JP6763449B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, it performs a lottery with the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the change production and directing those of or in accordance with the lottery result, pachinko machine to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen is known. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. ..

In such a pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a player is given a notice effect related to the game.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-279560

In this type of pachinko machine and the like , there has been a demand for a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable Rukoto improves interest in the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has identification information consisting of a determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition and at least a plurality of symbol strings for notifying the determination result by the determination means. The identification information on the display means, the stop symbol determining means for determining the symbol to be stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of symbol strings as the identification information for showing the determination result of the determination means, and the display means. Is dynamically displayed, and then the display control means for stopping and displaying the symbol determined by the stop symbol determining means is provided, and when the identification information for showing the specific determination result is displayed, the player As a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the above and a dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means, one dynamic display from a plurality of dynamic display modes is performed based on the determination result. When the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the mode and the display mode of the stop symbol stopped and displayed after the dynamic display executed immediately before are the specific display modes, the specific display mode is related to the specific display mode. When the effect display means capable of displaying the effect display on the display means based on the start of the next dynamic display and the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfy a predetermined condition. In addition, there is a privilege effect executing means for executing the privilege effect, and a predetermined specific dynamic display mode is set in the plurality of dynamic display modes, and the effect display means is the specific. wherein associated with said particular display mode than the identification information is dynamically displayed in a dynamic display mode is stopped and displayed after the dynamic display of the previous the stop symbol to display a specific effect display, before symbol gaming machine , said Ri der possible to stop displaying the stop symbols after said dynamic displayed in a manner different from the specific display manner, the stop symbol determination means, the identification information for indicating the specific determination results as, Ru der can determine the display mode different from the specific display manner.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a display means for displaying identification information composed of at least a plurality of symbol strings for notifying the determination result by the determination means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the stop symbol determining means for determining the symbol to be stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of symbol strings as the identification information for showing the determination result of the determination means, and on the display means. It has a display control means for displaying a stop display at a symbol determined by the stop symbol determination means later, and when the identification information for showing a specific determination result is displayed, a privilege advantageous to the player is provided. As a dynamic display mode in which the privilege granting means that can be granted and the identification information are dynamically displayed on the display means, one dynamic display mode is determined from a plurality of dynamic display modes based on the determination result. When the target display mode determining means and the display mode of the stop symbol stopped and displayed after the dynamic display executed immediately before are the specific display modes, the specific effect display related to the specific display mode is next. When the effect display means that can be displayed on the display means based on the start of the dynamic display of the above and the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfy a predetermined condition, a privilege effect is provided. It has a privilege effect executing means to be executed, and a predetermined specific dynamic display mode is set in the plurality of dynamic display modes, and the effect display means is the specific dynamic display mode. wherein associated with said particular display mode than the identification information is dynamically displayed stopped and displayed after the previous dynamic display the stop symbol to display a specific effect display, before symbol gaming machine, said specific display aspects and Ri said stop symbols can be stopped and displayed der after the dynamic display in a different display mode, the stop symbol determination means, as the identification information for indicating the specific determination result, the specific display manner as Ru der able to determine the different display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) to (i) are diagrams showing the type of the third symbol. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the left and right symbols in the conversation notice fluctuation pattern are stopped and displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a conversation is established in the conversation notice. , (C) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a conversation notice effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the conversation notice effect, (b) is a diagram showing the reach display mode after the conversation notice effect in the conversation notice variation pattern, and (c) is a diagram showing the reach display mode after the conversation notice effect. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when a conversation in a conversation notice is unsuccessful. It is a block diagram which showed the electric composition of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and (b) is the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship schematically. It is a figure which showed an example of the contents of ROM of MPU of a main control device schematically. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the conversation notice selection table of the character ROM of the display control device. It is a figure which showed an example of a conversation notice data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a conversation notice processing for display executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a stop type command process dedicated to conversation notice executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart shown. It is a flowchart which shows the error command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a time chart when the conversation of the pachinko machine conversation notice in the second embodiment is established, and (b) is a time chart when the conversation of the pachinko machine conversation notice in the second embodiment is not established. It is a time chart. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which the pre-variation of the conversation notice variation pattern of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is executed and the pre-variation of the variation is stopped, and (b) is the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when the conversation in the conversation notice of the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment is established, and (c) is the figure which the conversation in the conversation notice of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is not established. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the case, (d) is the reduction display area displayed on the 3rd symbol display device when the conversation notice of the pachinko machine 10 in the 2nd Embodiment is displayed. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the display control device of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the conversation dummy notice processing for display to be performed. (A) is a time chart when the conversation of the pachinko machine conversation notice in the third embodiment is established, and (b) is the case where the conversation of the pachinko machine conversation notice in the third embodiment is not established. It is a time chart. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart when the conversation of the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment is established. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the conversation notice effect processing executed by MPU in the display control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the conversation notice of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display effect selection table 1 of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the display effect selection table 2 of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example schematically. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the conversation notice data table of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the conversation notice process 2 for display which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the display effect selection table 3 of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the display effect selection table 4 of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the conversation notice process 3 for display which is executed by MPU in the display control device in the modification of 5th Embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment, and (c) is a game of the frame button in the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode which informs a person to press. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode for notifying the player that the conversation notice effect of the pachinko machine according to the sixth embodiment is executed, and FIG. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode which informs a player that the conversation notice effect of the above is not executed, and (c) is a display mode when the conversation of the conversation notice of a pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment is unsuccessful. It is a figure which showed an example. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device of a pachinko machine in a sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the button pressing effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in 6th Embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment, and (c) is the display mode of the conversation notice effect of the pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) is a time chart showing a case where the conversation in the pachinko machine conversation notice in the seventh embodiment is established, and (b) is a time chart in which the conversation in the pachinko machine conversation notice in the seventh embodiment is not established. It is a time chart showing a case. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the conversation notice pattern table (off) of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the conversation notice pattern table (hit) of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a pachinko machine conversation notice production data patable (10 seconds) according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a conversation notice of the pachinko machine according to the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the production data pattern (8 seconds). It is a figure which shows typically an example of the conversation notice effect data pattern (5 seconds) of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the button pressing effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 7 executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 8th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

The stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "empty stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Then, various effects such as variable effects and reach effects that are performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, the "city stage" → "empty stage" "→" Island stage "→" City stage "→ ... It is changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launch unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is set to ON and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, so that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the above, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined force or more hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first entry port 64, and when the ball passes through the second entry port 67, a normal symbol (first symbol) is drawn. 2 symbols) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are two types of jackpots for special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn. A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize in the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entry opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. Become in a state. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the first entry port 64, and as a result, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the number of reserved balls 37. It is also indicated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

As described above, there are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B".

When it becomes "big hit A" and "big hit B", it becomes a special game state (16R big hit) with 16 rounds, and after that, as an added value after the big hit, if it is "big hit A", it will be the next big hit. Until this happens, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", the time is shortened for the normal symbol from the end of the jackpot until the lottery is executed 100 times (until the change of the special symbol starts).

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). Further, the "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol time saving middle) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. On the other hand, the time when it is not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is called "the normal state of the normal symbol", which indicates that the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state, that is, the state where the hit probability is lower than that during the time saving. ..

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the "time reduction of the normal symbol" is made according to the type of the jackpot. The period of "state" is changed. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. In addition, for example, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened" depending on the type of jackpot, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entry port 64, or once. The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed by hitting the normal symbol of. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the "special symbol high probability state" and the "normal symbol time saving state" are set, but after the "special symbol high probability state" ends, the "normal symbol time saving state" is reached. May be configured to be.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol". After that, when the special symbol becomes a big hit, it shifts to the "high probability state of the special symbol" and also shifts to the "time saving state of the normal symbol".

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery for a special symbol performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the fluctuation of the balls entered in the first entry port 64 is not executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. , The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with that as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing individual symbols that are variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to 4 (i), a symbol which is a kind of symbol is composed of nine kinds of main symbols to which numbers "1" to "9" are attached. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5A, three symbol columns Z1 are set side by side as display areas on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81. In the symbol row Z1, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are respectively scrolled and displayed in the vertical direction in ascending order. It is configured to notify the player of the jackpot of the game (the jackpot game is started) by the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1.

As shown in FIG. 5 (b), on the display screen, three symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1. In the present embodiment, the effective line is only the symbol string Z1, but a plurality of effective lines (for example, three horizontal effective lines and two diagonal effective lines) are set on the display screen. You may.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) correspond to "probability variation symbols", and when jackpot A, which is a 16R probability variation jackpot, occurs, they are the same. The combination of probabilistic symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "normal symbols", and when a jackpot B, which is a 16R normal jackpot, occurs, the same combination of normal symbols is used. It is displayed as a stop.

The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol row. The number of symbols can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol performed when the ball passes through the second entry port 67 is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 operates for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit and displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. To. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, as in the case of the first entry port 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and the number of times the ball passes through the second entry port 67 is three times or less, or five times or more. It may be set to (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and this is caused by the turning on of the first entry opening switch. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (16 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About look-ahead production>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various information (whether or not, stop type) is obtained based on the fact that a game ball enters the first entry port 64 and various counters are acquired for the reserved ball of the special symbol. , Fluctuation pattern) is determined (look-ahead) in advance. When the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command (big hit winning command or losing winning command) including various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect. The details of the look-ahead effect will be omitted later.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of main controller 110>
The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

As shown in FIG. 11, the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 includes a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a normal symbol per random number table 202c, a jackpot variation pattern table 202d, and a deviation pattern table 202e, respectively. It is provided. In the present embodiment, the above is given as an example of the data table set in the ROM 202, but other data tables, programs, and the like are also stored. The various data tables described above will be described in detail in order to explain the various counters described below.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and the balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 11) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is the jackpot random number. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the table 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, the jackpot random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol jackpot than that of the low probability (special symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (period in which it is in a high probability state) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability of the special symbol and the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability of the special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random numbers "7,107,282" are the jackpot random numbers for the low probability. It is stored in the table 202a. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/100".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are big hits for the special symbol, and the values are "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106, 112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 "is added to the jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. It is stored. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 30 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/10".

In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value stored in the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability time and the jackpot random number value stored in the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability time are used. Random numbers that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, and it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 59", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by the jackpot type table 202b, and this table is set in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the "completely off" stop type so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79, when the probability is low. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). It is acquired at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entry port 64, and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern tables 202d and 202e, which store random values for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, are provided in ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

In the fluctuation pattern table, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d and a deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (see FIG. 11) are set respectively. For example, in the variable pattern table 202e for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d shared by jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of "shared normal reach", various types of "shared super reach", and various types of "shared special reach" are specified. Here, as one of the fluctuation patterns for the deviation, the deviation conversation notice fluctuation pattern is set. In addition, a conversation notice fluctuation pattern is set as one of various types of "shared super reach". Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

6 (a) to 6 (c) and 7 (a) to 7 (b) are diagrams schematically showing an example of a missed conversation notice fluctuation pattern or a hit conversation notice fluctuation pattern. After the fluctuation of the third symbol is started on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 6A, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the middle symbol is displayed at high speed. Or it becomes a state of fluctuating at low speed. As shown in FIG. 6A, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped in a non-reach state) with different symbols.

As shown in FIG. 6B, a comment is displayed by a balloon (comment window) from the character of the third symbol (the character of the turtle in the present embodiment) stopped at the left symbol. After that, the comment of the conversation for the comment of the left symbol is displayed by the balloon from the character of the third symbol (the character of the dolphin in the present embodiment) which is stopped at the right symbol. In this way, in the out-of-conversation notice fluctuation pattern or the hit conversation notice fluctuation pattern, the notice display for having a conversation is executed by the symbols temporarily stopped in the left symbol and the right symbol. When the content of the conversation is established as shown in FIG. 6 (b), the production notice of whether or not to reach is executed as shown in FIG. 6 (c). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), in response to the comment that the character of the left symbol is "Let's compete?", The comment that the character of the right symbol is "OK !!" is established. Therefore, it indicates that the conversation was established.

If the conversation is not established, as shown in FIG. 7C, "..." is displayed in which the character of the right symbol does not reply to the conversation of the character of the left symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, it is shown that the conversation is not established when the character with the right symbol does not reply anything, but the conversation is not limited to this, and when the character with the right symbol makes a comment "No !!" However, it corresponds to the fact that the conversation was unsuccessful. Further, not limited to the contents described in the present embodiment, it is sufficient to show that the conversation was not established when the contents of the conversation between the left symbol and the right symbol do not match.

When the conversation is established, as shown in FIG. 6C, a display mode in which the character "turtle" with the left symbol and the character "shark" with the right symbol compete for the goal is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 7 (a), when the character "turtle" of the left symbol reaches the goal before the character "shark" of the right symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are shown as shown in FIG. 7 (b). The third symbol of "turtle" is displayed on the screen, and it is in the reach state. That is, the conversation notice is a notice display mode for notifying the player whether or not to reach. After that, in the out-of-conversation notice variation pattern or the hit conversation advance notice variation pattern, a predetermined variation display mode (dynamic display mode) such as normal reach or super reach is displayed.

In addition, if the conversation content is not established, or if the conversation content is established but the reach state is not reached due to the subsequent advance notice production, the specified middle symbol will stop and the lottery result will be missed. You will be notified. In this way, the hit conversation notice fluctuation pattern is configured to be in the reach state without fail. Further, the out-of-conversation notice variation pattern is set in both the reach state and the non-reach state, and is configured to differ depending on the out-of-conversation notice pattern selected by the lottery.

In this way, when the conversation notice is executed, the player can expect that the conversation is established and becomes a big hit. Therefore, the game can be performed with the expectation that the fluctuation in which the conversation notice is executed is started, and it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored at an early stage.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. When this is done, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the random number table 202c per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the random number counter C4 per second is the random number table 202c per normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by, it is judged to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, the random number table 202c per normal symbol is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability of hitting a normal symbol (normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10B, when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the fluctuation display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 26) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 23) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a counter 203e and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are set to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to, a determination such as a lottery for a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired according to the starting prize, the original special symbol is displayed. Apart from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, various types obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1) before the original special symbol lottery is performed. Predicting the information is described as pre-reading the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, as various information, whether it is right or wrong, the type of stop, the fluctuation pattern, and the like correspond.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses these as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

In the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the winning / failing determination result (pre-reading determination result) determined by S407 of the start winning process (FIGS. 21, S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, is also reserved. It is stored in each of the first to fourth areas.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes vacant. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see FIG. 21, S404). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see FIGS. 19, S205).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see FIGS. 19, S206, 21, S405). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command. In the transliteration form, although not shown, one "●" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for each hold.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d determines the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See FIG. 23, S704). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see FIG. 22, S605).

When the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held M in the normal symbol) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (FIG. 23, S705). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not done (FIG. 23, S703: No).

The time saving / medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a new value is set according to the big hit type regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e.

Specifically, if it is determined to be "big hit B", it is set to 100 (see FIG. 19, S214). After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e becomes 0 (FIGS. 19, S217).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the normal symbol is based on the random number table 202c per normal symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0, the lottery is performed based on the random number table 202c per normal symbol for low probability (see FIGS. 22, S610, and S611).

The other memory area 203z is an area in which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores various other flags and data required for controlling the pachinko machine 10.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including switch groups and sensor groups (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

<Electrical configuration of audio lamp control device 113>
The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores control programs necessary for various controls, various data, and the like. The ROM 222 stores a variation pattern table in which variation patterns are stored, and is determined by the main control device 110 based on the variation pattern commands output from the main control device 110 and various winning information commands. It is configured so that the fluctuation pattern can be discriminated.

The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, an effect counter 223e, and other memory areas 223z. At least it is provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in response to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see FIG. 29, S1409). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223c is set to on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see FIGS. 29 and S1402), and when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. It is set to off (see FIG. 30, S1502). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is set to on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 29), and when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. Is set to off (see S1607 in FIG. 30).

The effect counter 223e is a counter value used for selecting the effect of the advance notice and the like. The effect counter 223e is a counter value that is incremented and updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, and is updated from the initial value of 0 to be an upper limit value. It is repeatedly updated in the range up to 99. The effect counter 223d is a counter value that is set to 0, which is an initial value, when a power failure occurs.

The RAM 223 also has another storage area 223z that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 29) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

<Electrical configuration of display control device 114>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

The pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the lottery probability of the special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by 1. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged consecutively on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. The second program storage area 234a1 to be stored, the character storage area 234a2 to store the data of the image (character, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the conversation notice and the conversation notice effect displayed in the conversation notice variation pattern. It has at least a conversation notice data table 234a3, which is a data table for displaying.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 of the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be enabled in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time to output the data after the address is specified in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 31) executed after the boot process (see S1601 in FIG. 32) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1603 and S1604 in FIG. 31).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to perform the power-on main image (in the present embodiment, the power-on main image). (Characters during power-on) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. Medium, alternate and repeat display. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" image is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" image is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images of "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description continues. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 8) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

Further, the third symbol area 235d corresponds to the main symbol composed of the rear symbols of various characters shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to 4 (i) as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9". The image data to be used is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a timing counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and also notifies the player of the game value (time saving period of the normal symbol) given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or a special symbol that is reserved. This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the display data table, which is a display data table for the variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the display data table, as the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses insertion and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. May be specified as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time (high-speed fluctuation period). While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 13). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

<Conversation notice data table>
Next, the details of the conversation notice selection table 234a3 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, in the conversation notice selection table 234a3, among the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the types of symbols displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and the selected conversation. It is selected by determining whether the advance notice fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which the conversation is established or a fluctuation pattern in which the conversation is not established. In FIG. 14, the conversation notice selection table 234a3 is shown in a simplified manner, but when the conversation notice displayed for each combination of symbols and the conversation are established, the subsequent conversation notice effect (FIG. 6 (c)). ) And the conversation notice data table (see FIG. 15) for setting the display of FIG. 7 (a)) are set in advance.

The conversation notice data table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 6 (b) to 6 (c) and 7 (a), the conversation notice data table has a comment display of the conversation notice and a conversation notice effect shown in FIGS. 6 (c) and 7 (a). Each is set to an address corresponding to the display timing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, when the pointer is updated to the address 0064H, the turtle "3 symbols" is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display of shaking fluctuation) in the left symbol row of the third symbol display device 81. Then, display data is set in which the characters "Would you like to compete?" Are displayed along with the balloon from the character of the turtle. The coordinates (X, Y) shown in FIG. 15 are simplified representations of the data of the display position where the left symbol and the comment are displayed. Although omitted in FIG. 15, similar display data is set at subsequent addresses as long as this display mode continues to be displayed. After that, when the pointer is updated to the address 008CH, in addition to the above-mentioned left symbol, the dolphin "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the character "OK !!" is displayed with a balloon from the dolphin character. Is displayed. After that, as long as this display mode is displayed, similar display data is set for subsequent addresses.

After that, as the display data to be transferred when the pointer is updated to the address 012CH, the display data of the conversation notice effect as shown in FIGS. 6 (c) and 7 (a) is set. In this conversation notice effect, display data in which characters and the like are moved and displayed is set in order at addresses 012CH and later.

This conversation notice data table is also set in the display data table buffer 233d of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and is transferred by the transfer data table described later to generate a drawing list (see FIG. 17). Similar to the display data table shown in FIG. 13, various data such as display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are also set in this conversation notice data table (see FIG. 15), but for the sake of brevity. In this embodiment, the description is omitted.

In this way, since the conversation notice data table for displaying the conversation notice is set separately from the display data table corresponding to the conversation notice fluctuation pattern data table, the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern can be set. The number can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the conversation notice data table is set separately from the display data table corresponding to the conversation notice fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the conversation notice data is set in the display data table of the conversation notice fluctuation pattern. The display contents set in the table may also be set.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table and the conversation notice data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, of the sprites used in the effect specified by the display data table. Of the image data, transfer data information for transferring image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 16). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. The Null data meaning (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 12).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In addition, in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table and the conversation notice data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (Fig. In the example of 16, “02F0H”) contains “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 16, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the characters "Initial setting in progress", which are images at power-on (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on), on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 sets it on in the main process (see FIG. 31) (see FIG. 31, S1605). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see FIG. 41 (b), S3405).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see FIGS. 33 (b) and S2101), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see FIGS. 33 (b) and S2108) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 33 (b) and S2108) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 33 (b), see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command is determined so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 38 to 40) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42 (a) and S3301), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Is a resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 (see FIGS. 42 (b) and S3302). When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 43) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 17), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 33 (b). ), S2103), the pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 40) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 17) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 17, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing information also includes drawing information set based on the conversation notice data table. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. After that, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 can be adjusted according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, Number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., Display contents of conversation notice, Error symbol (not shown), corresponding to each sprite Detailed information to be described is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side. As a result, when the drawing content based on the conversation notice data table is set, it can be displayed on the front side from the drawing information set in the display data table corresponding to the conversation notice variation pattern.

With this configuration, even if the conversation notice fluctuation pattern is not displayed, the conversation notice data table can be set so that the player can see the conversation notice fluctuation pattern as if it were another fluctuation pattern. It can be done and the number of fluctuation patterns can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the conversation notice is displayed on the front side by setting an image corresponding to the conversation notice data table at the end of the drawing list, but the present invention is not limited to this. When an image based on the data table is set, only the image based on the conversation notice data table may be set in the drawing list. With this configuration, the process of creating a drawing list can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 33 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see FIG. 38 and S3008). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see FIG. 31, S1602) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see FIGS. 43 and S3517). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see FIGS. 43 and S3518). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see FIG. 44, S3602).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 33 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see FIG. 44, S3602).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Control processing executed by MPU 201 of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 18 to 26. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 19 to 21.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate is passed along with the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol change start processing is executed, a lottery for special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot is among the two types of jackpots of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type. If is a jackpot A, the setting related to the jackpot A is executed (S213). In the setting related to the jackpot A, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in this embodiment) and the probability variation jackpot are set (S213). Further, in the case of the jackpot B, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the number of time reductions (100 times in the present embodiment) are set (S214). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), and this process ends.

In the process of S211 if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S216). When it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S217), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the processing of S221 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 19) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a high probability state (during probability change) (S302). When in the high-probability gaming state (S302: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot random number table 202a for the high-probability time (S304).

In the process of S304, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the big hit random number table 202a for high probability. Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 30 random number values stored in the jackpot random number table 202a for high probability one by one. As described above, as the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106,112,122,134,140,151,168" , 176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 ", and the value of the first random number counter C1 and these hits If it matches the random number value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S306.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the gaming state is the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S302: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the value for the low probability time are used. Based on the jackpot random number table 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S305). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 3 stored in the jackpot random number table 202a for low probability one by one. Three random numbers "7,107,282" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values to be hits match. , Judged as a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S306.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S304 or S305 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S306), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S306: Yes). The display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) (S307). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the variation pattern table (not shown). Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by this fluctuation pattern table.

For example, as the variation pattern for disengagement, various types of "disengagement", "normal reach disengagement", "super reach disengagement", and "special reach disengagement" are defined. Various "probability change jackpot normal reach", "probability variation jackpot super reach", and "probability variation jackpot special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A, and various "normal jackpot normal reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for jackpot B. , "Normal jackpot super reach" and "Normal jackpot special reach" are stipulated.

In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S306: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S309). In the process of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined from the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation pattern of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Determine (variation time).

When the processing of S308 or the processing of S310 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S308 or the processing of S310 is set (S311). A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (stop type at the time of a big hit) is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 26). To. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , It is a process for executing the hold process of the value indicated by various random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entry port 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball slot 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball slot 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area. After that, the process of S407 is executed.

In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in S406 is determined to be a big hit at the start of fluctuation. Whether the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state is determined from the determination result of the reserved ball stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the judgment of whether or not it is correct is made. Perform in advance (pre-reading judgment of success / failure judgment result). In the process of S407, not only the hit / fail determination result but also the stop type and the fluctuation pattern are determined and stored in the corresponding hold area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a.

If it is determined to be a jackpot in the process of S407 (S407: Yes), a jackpot winning command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set based on the stop type and the fluctuation pattern (S408). Here, for example, if the jackpot A is a super reach, a jackpot winning command corresponding to the super reach is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the deviation is out of the process of S402 (S407: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern is super reach (S409). In the process of S409, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is super reach (S409: Yes), a missed reach winning command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set (S409). On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern different from that of the super reach (S409: No), a missed winning command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set (S411). The winning information command is configured so that the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can identify the type of the selected variation pattern. That is, when the conversation notice variation pattern is the selected variation pattern, the variation pattern is configured to be identifiable.

When set, the winning information command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entry port 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is performed while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit. Includes monaka. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S604 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S609). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, the lottery of ordinary symbols is less likely to be won during the jackpot of special symbols. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first entry opening 64 is released. This is to prevent the ball trying to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first entry opening 64 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the first one Many balls enter the ball entry port 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximized (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so it is acquired by the processing of S607. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the random number table 202c per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 10B).

In the process of S608, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the random number table 202c per normal symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 10B).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first entry port 64 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S617), and shift to the process of S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the first entry port 64 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entry port 64.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol stops at the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit up). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, then when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is controlled. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is set to ON (S904), and if it is set to ON (S904: Yes), the process is performed to S912. Move to. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). No) Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 26, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 are correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. For example (S907: Yes), the power cutout occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 19) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 21) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20) ends, the first symbol display device The change display executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 22), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 22). Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process is executed. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 24 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

<Control processing executed by MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1318 (see FIG. 28) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 28), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S1318. The power off processing flag is set to on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is set to off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1318. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data shifts to S1208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is set to ON (S1208). The power-off flag is set to on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 28). That is, since the power-off flag is set to on before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, it is the start-up process of this time that leads to the process of S1208 with the power-off flag set to on. This is a case where the power is started after the momentary power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the processing of S1208 is reached with the power off flag set to off via the processing of S1204 to S1206 because the startup processing this time was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing of S1208 is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 to S1206, the processing of S1204 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variation display setting process of S1312, the command determination process of S1311, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1311 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without notifying the power on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is made, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307), the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to perform an effect corresponding to. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in the rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expected value of the jackpot can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1307 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In this variation display setting process (S1312), a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. .. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1315), and the power-off process is executed (S1316). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1317), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1314), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process (S1311), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is generated from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1402).

After S1402 is executed, the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1403), and it is determined whether or not it is a type of conversation notice variation pattern (S1405). If it is determined that the conversation notice variation pattern is used (S1404: Yes), a display conversation notice command is set (S1405). On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is other than the conversation notice fluctuation pattern (S1404: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main controller 110 (S1406). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1406: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1407), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1408), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 30) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1406: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1409). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1409: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1410). Further, in the process of S1410, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1410 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning prize is given. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the process of S1410 to the special symbol reserved ball counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1410 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1409, if the reserved ball count command is not received (S1409: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1419). ), Return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the variation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1501). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1506 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1502), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1404 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S1503).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

In the process of S1505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1505). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1505: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1506), and then in the process of S1408 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1507).

In the process of S1508, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1508), and the process proceeds to the process of S1509. Here, the display control device 114 is notified of the stop type corresponding to the accurate stop type (complete loss, front-rear out-of-reach, jackpot (big hit A, jackpot B), etc.).

In the process of S1509, it is determined whether the received variation pattern command is a kind of conversation notice variation pattern (S1509). If the received fluctuation pattern command is determined to be a fluctuation pattern other than the conversation notice fluctuation pattern (S1509: No), the display control device 114 is notified based on the stop type set in the process of S1508. A stop type command for display is generated for this purpose, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1511). When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

On the other hand, in the process of S1509, when it is determined that the received fluctuation pattern command is a kind of conversation notice fluctuation pattern (S1509: Yes), the display conversation notice dedicated stop type command is set (S1512). The display-only conversation notice stop type command is a command for instructing the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 to set the display of the symbol in the conversation notice.

The stop type command for display conversation notice is based on the content of the display conversation notice command set in the process of S1405 of the command determination process (FIGS. 29, S1311) executed by the MPU 231 of the voice lamp control device 113. Set. In detail, the content of the conversation notice is set for each of the left symbol and the right symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 14, and is predetermined when the process of S1405 is executed. It is determined by the lottery (determined by acquiring the value of the effect counter 223e) and the conversation notice fluctuation pattern. When the conversation notice fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which the conversation notice is established, one of the conversation notices is established by lottery, and when the conversation notice is not established, the conversation notice is not established. One of them will be decided by lottery. In addition, in the hit conversation notice fluctuation pattern, all conversation notices are set to be established. Then, a stop type command dedicated to the display conversation notice corresponding to the left symbol and the right symbol of the set (selected) conversation notice is set.

<Control processing executed by MPU 231 of the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 43, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 31, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the processing according to the fetched instruction to start the main processing.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1601), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S1601) will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1701). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1702, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1702, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1703). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S1601 in FIG. 31) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 31) (S1705), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S1601) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 32, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1701 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S1702. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1703 to S1705 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1701. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S1702 and S1702, the processes of S1703 to S1705 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes S1703 to S1705 may be executed without performing the processes S1701 and S1702. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 31. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1603). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S1603, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S1604). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. Is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1604, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1605). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 41 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 42A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33 (b)), a simple command determination process is performed so that an image at power-on (main image at power-on or variable image at power-on) that is not shown is drawn. (See FIG. 33 (b), S2108) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 33 (b), S2109) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1605, the interrupt permission is set (S1606), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1606, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 33 (a). FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 33 (b). FIG. 33B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 17) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 33B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (not shown) but a normal production image. Is executed on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2103) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37.

In the display setting process (S2103), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object), various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process (S2105), while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 to the image controller 237. Set the transfer instruction to be transferred. The details of the transfer setting process (S2105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 43.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), which are determined in the task process (S2104), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed to shift to the process of S2104.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 34, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (a). FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing (S2205) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing (S2205), first, a display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. It is set to the table buffer 233d (S2301).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time is displayed. Set to the display data table buffer 233d.

If the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device 110. When instructed by, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having the above is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the next display pattern from the main control device 110 Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. You can keep watching the fluctuation of the design.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other display data tables are turned on. The data table determination flag corresponding to is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can do.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer 233f Is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2306).

After that, the fluctuation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment processing. By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305, from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301 The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2302. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 as the image of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the display data table is timed by using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and it is determined that the variation effect in the display data table is completed. In this case, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 34. In the processing of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variable type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variation effect to be performed is finally set (S2402).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S2403).

Here, as described above, in the display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation based on the data table, Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2105), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but the character ROM 234 is used as a normal video before drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2401, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2402.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 34. In the process of S2206, if it is determined that the display stop type command has not been received (S2206: No), it is determined whether the display conversation notice command has been received (S2208). When it is determined that the display conversation notice command has been received, the display conversation notice process is executed (S2209), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the display conversation advance notice process (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (a). FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing the display conversation advance notice process (S2209). In the display conversation notice process (FIG. 36 (a), S2209), a process of setting the notice display mode related to the conversation notice is executed.

In the display conversation notice processing (FIGS. 36 (a), S2209), first, the conversation notice data table corresponding to the display conversation notice command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is selected (determined) from the conversation notice selection table 234a3. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501). The transfer data table corresponding to the set conversation notice data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). The data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S2503), the time data is set to the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set data table (S2504), the pointer 233f is initialized (S2505), and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 34. If it is determined in the process of S2208 that the display conversation advance notice command has not been received (S2208: No), it is determined whether or not the display conversation advance notice dedicated stop type command has been received from the voice lamp control device 113. (S2210). If it is determined that the display conversation notice-only stop type command has been received (S2210: Yes), the conversation notice-only stop type command process is executed (S2211), and the process of S2201 is executed.

Here, the stop type command processing (S2211) dedicated to the conversation notice will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (b). FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing dedicated to the conversation notice. This conversation notice-only stop type command process (FIGS. 36 (b), S2211) executes a process corresponding to the display conversation notice-only variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the conversation notice-only stop type command processing (FIG. 36 (b), S2211), first, the stop type information (big hit A, jackpot B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, etc., indicated by the display conversation notice only stop type command, A stop type table dedicated to the conversation notice corresponding to (one of the complete deviations) is determined (S2601), and after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the stop type table dedicated to the conversation notice. The stop symbol is finally set (S2602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S2603).

Here, as described above, in the display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation based on the data table, The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2105), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 34. In the processing of S2210, when it is determined that the stop type command for display conversation notice has not been received (S2210: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2210: No). If there is an error command (S2212: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S2213), and the process returns to the processing of S2201.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing error command processing (S2213). This error command processing (S2213) executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing (FIG. 37, S2213), first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2701). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S2702). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2701, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S2702 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S2702, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 34. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2213 (S2213: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2219), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

In the processing of S2201 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), Each process from S2202 to S2219 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2219 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2201 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 35 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 35 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 35A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2301. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 38, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 38. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3005.

In S3005, the pointer update process is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process (FIG. 40, S3005), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S2802). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3203), and if it is a demo display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2803, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3203: No). S3206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 38 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the fluctuation display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on ( S3009).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set to. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the display data table, the variation based on the data table starts. From the time when a predetermined time elapses, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2104), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3017) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3017: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on ends, the image of the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the display is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3301 (S3301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (b). FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. .. When it is determined by the process of S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3301, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3403.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No), the non-resident image data is not transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33 (b)), instead of the simple command determination process and the simple display setting process, the command determination process (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and the display setting process (FIGS. 38 to 40). Since (see) is executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the image at the normal time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) (see S3301: No in FIG. 41 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 contains image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by the above, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

In this normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 42, S3303), first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is acquired (S3501). Here, the information indicated by the pointers of the transfer data table of the display data table and the advance notice transfer data table of the advance notice data table is acquired, respectively. Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3502), and if it is the transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Further, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

In the process of S3406, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3507. Further, as a result of the processing of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508),
In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The discrimination in the processing of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3517, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3517 (S3517: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3418). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3518, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3519), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

Next, it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3513). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2105) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated (S3601). That is, in the processing of S3601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2105). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In the present embodiment, the notice display mode of the conversation notice is set so that the display order is in the foreground. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 6 (b) to 6 (c) and 7 (a), the display mode of the conversation notice is on the front side of the symbol or other characters set in the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Is displayed. Further, the conversation notice effect displayed when the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 6 (c) and 7 (a) is established hides the fluctuation of the symbol set in the display data table of the fluctuation pattern. It is displayed on the front side. In the meantime, a temporary third symbol (special symbol) indicating that the special symbol (third symbol) is changing is indicated by two "○" in the lower left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. By alternately turning on and off the "○", the player is notified that the change is in progress.

In the display data table of the conversation notice fluctuation pattern, the third symbol is set to fluctuate at low speed or high speed during this period, and if the conversation notice is not displayed, the fluctuation of the symbol is displayed. It is composed.

With this configuration, the conversation notice variation pattern can be used as a normal variation pattern even when the conversation notice is not executed. Therefore, the number of fluctuation patterns can be reduced, and the amount of data of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, by setting the drawing data of the conversation notice at the end of the drawing list, the conversation notice is displayed on the front side of the display content set in the variable pattern. However, when the drawing data of the conversation notice is set, the drawing data on the back side of the drawing data may not be set in the drawing list.

Further, the drawing content of the conversation notice in the present embodiment may also be configured to be set in advance in the display data table corresponding to the conversation notice variation pattern.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3502). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S3602 (S3603). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 33B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is configured to select the conversation advance notice fluctuation pattern, but the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 roughly determines the fluctuation pattern (for example, determines only the number of fluctuation seconds). ), And the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 determines a detailed fluctuation pattern such as the conversation notice fluctuation pattern by lottery or the like based on the rough determination of the fluctuation pattern of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the control load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in order to execute the conversation notice, but this is a temporary stop display in which the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed by slightly shaking and fluctuating to display the stop, and the player can see the stop display. The symbol has been stopped without being displayed as a fixed stop. In the present embodiment, when the symbol is stopped and displayed without shaking, it is a case where the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time predetermined for the fluctuation pattern has elapsed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol on which the conversation notice is executed is stopped in a symbol (non-reach display mode) different between the left symbol and the right symbol, but the display is not limited to this and is displayed in the reach display mode. You may. In this case, whether or not the conversation is established to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit (a display mode that is easily displayed when the big hit occurs), or whether or not the conversation notice effect executed after the conversation is established is a big hit. It may be configured to execute an effect of notifying.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 49. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the display mode of the conversation notice is set based on the fact that the conversation notice fluctuation pattern is selected by the main control device 110.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, whether or not to determine the stop symbol of the change of the previous special symbol (third symbol) and execute the conversation notice at the start of the next change. It differs from the first embodiment in that it makes a decision. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Conversation notice in the second embodiment>
The outline of the conversation notice in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. 44 (a) and 44 (b) are time charts showing changes in the case where the conversation notice is established and the case where the conversation notice is not established.

FIG. 44A is a time chart showing a case where the conversation notice is established and the conversation notice effect is executed. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation 1 that started to fluctuate earlier is a fluctuation pattern in which the hit / fail determination result is out of order and is stopped by the stop symbol as shown in FIG. 45 (a). In the fluctuation pattern of variation 1, the symbol low-speed fluctuation period: T is passed, and the third symbol is variable-displayed at high speed on the third symbol display device 81. After that, after passing through the symbol low-speed fluctuation period again, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), after the three symbols are temporarily stopped in the symbol row Z1, the symbol temporary stop period (sway fluctuation period) is displayed by shaking slightly up and down. ), It will be stopped. Then, during the fixed suspension period (1 second in the present embodiment), after the fixed suspension, the variation of the special symbol (third symbol) of the variation 2 corresponding to the next pending hold is started. In this case, if the stop symbol of variation 1 is determined, whether or not the conversation notice can be given, and if the symbol is capable of giving a conversation notice, the change pattern of variation 2 establishes the conversation notice. The conversation notice data table is set by determining whether the fluctuation pattern may be (a hit conversation notice fluctuation pattern or a missed conversation notice fluctuation pattern that is set to establish a conversation notice).

Since the variation 2 shown in FIG. 44 (a) is a variation pattern in which the conversation notice is established, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 45 (b) is displayed over the symbol low-speed fluctuation period to the symbol high-speed fluctuation period. The conversation notice effect shown in FIGS. 6 (c) and 7 (a) is displayed over the subsequent high-speed fluctuation period of the symbol and the low-speed fluctuation period of the symbol.

After that, it is notified that the reach will be reached, the display mode of the super reach set in the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation 2 is displayed, and then the symbol is temporarily stopped by the combination of the symbols showing the lottery result. After that, it will be fixedly suspended after a temporary suspension period for symbols.

As shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the conversation notice in the second embodiment, when the fluctuation start timing of the fluctuation 2 is reached, the display area of the third symbol is reduced as shown in FIG. 45 (b). It is formed in the display area 81s, and in the reduced display area 81s, the third symbol is reduced and scrolled from top to bottom as shown in FIG. 45 (d). With this configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the variable display of the third symbol is being performed. Further, since the size of the reduced display area 81s is set to be sufficiently smaller than the display area where the conversation notice is displayed (about 1/16 in the present embodiment), the display mode of the conversation notice is hindered. Can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol displayed in the reduced display area 81s is displayed with the enlargement ratio of the character in the normal state reduced by the display setting of the display data table, but the reduced symbol data. May be set exclusively and configured to display the symbol. With this configuration, the control load required for the reduction process can be reduced, and the control load of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol to be displayed in the reduced display area 81s is scrolled from top to bottom as in the normal time, but is not limited to this, and is different from the normal time such as right to left. It may be configured to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying the scroll display or the symbol blinking (increasing or decreasing the brightness of the symbol or changing the transparency of the symbol). In addition, by blinking the symbol without scrolling it, it is possible to easily notify that the symbol is changing even in a small display area.

FIG. 44B is a time chart showing fluctuations when the conversation notice is unsuccessful. Since the variation 1 is the same as the variation 1 shown in FIG. 44 (a), the description thereof will be omitted. The time chart shown in FIG. 44B determines the stop symbol of the fluctuation 1 at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation 2, and if it is a stop symbol capable of executing the conversation notice, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation 2 is discriminated and the conversation is performed. It is a time chart when it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern in which the notice is not established. In this case, after the conversation notice shown in FIG. 45 (c) is displayed in the symbol low-speed fluctuation period, the display mode in which the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed set in the display data table of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation 2. Is displayed. After that, after the temporary stop is displayed by the combination of the symbols indicating the lottery result, the symbol is temporarily suspended, and then the confirmation is stopped.

With this configuration, even if the lottery result is changed, the player will be able to execute the conversation notice if the stop symbol is a combination in which the conversation notice is given, and will be a big hit in the next change. You can play the game with the expectation that it may be. Therefore, the player can expect the stop symbol to be able to give a notice of conversation, and can enjoy the game with the expectation of a big hit even if the lottery result is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment>
FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment. A stop symbol history flag 233m is added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment with respect to the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The stop symbol history flag 233m is a flag indicating that the stop symbol capable of executing the conversation notice is displayed in the previous variation. The pre-variation refers to the variation of the special symbol immediately before the variation that starts the variation.

The stop symbol history flag 233m can be used to give a conversation notice to the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped in the process of the stop type command process 2 (FIGS. 49 (a) and S2215) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. When it is determined, it is set to ON in the process of S2411. On the other hand, it is set to off in the processing of S2223 of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. In the initial setting executed when the power is turned on, the stop symbol history flag 233m is a flag set to off.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
In the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the variable display setting process (S1312) of the main process (see FIG. 28) is the variable display setting process 2 with respect to the first embodiment. The process has been changed to (FIG. 47, S1320). As for other processes, the same processes as those executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment are executed.

The variation display setting process 2 (S1320) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 2 (S1320). In the variable display setting process 2 (S1320), the processes S1509 and S1512 are deleted from the variable display setting process (FIGS. 30 and S1312) in the first embodiment, and the processes S1701 to S1713 are the first. The same processes as those of S1501 to S1508 and S1511 of the variable display setting process (S1312) in one embodiment are executed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control device 114 in the second embodiment>
In the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment, the V interrupt process (FIG. 33 (b)) is performed with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment. The command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102), which is one of the processes, has been changed to the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

The command determination process 2 (S2110) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S2110). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110) in the second embodiment, each process from S2220 to S2222 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment, and the process of S2207 is added. Is changed to the process of S2215, and each process of S2208 to S2211 is deleted. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In the process of S2204 of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110), when it is determined from the voice lamp control device 113 whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the stop symbol history flag 233m is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (S2220). That is, it is determined whether the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation is a stop symbol in which the conversation notice can be executed. In the present embodiment, the stop symbol capable of giving a conversation notice is set to a stop symbol other than the reach symbol in which the left symbol and the right symbol are the same symbol. Not limited to this, only a specific stop symbol (for example, a turtle on the left symbol, a shark on the right symbol, etc.) may be set as a symbol capable of giving a conversation notice, or if it is a symbol other than the reach symbol, it is predetermined. If the lottery is executed and the result is a win (when a counter is acquired and the value is a predetermined value), the conversation notice may be determined as an executable symbol.

In the process of S2220, when it is determined that the stop symbol history flag 233m is on (S2220: Yes), the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command received this time is a fluctuation pattern in which a conversation notice can be established. Is determined (S2221). Here, the fluctuation patterns in which the conversation notice can be established are the winning conversation notice fluctuation pattern and the off-conversation notice fluctuation pattern set when the conversation notice is established. It should be noted that the out-of-conversation notice fluctuation pattern set when the conversation notice is established is always set to a fluctuation pattern that becomes reach. As a result, even if the lottery result is incorrect, the conversation notice is established, so that the player can always show the variation mode of the reach, and the player can have a feeling of expectation for the big hit.

When it is determined that the conversation notice is a fluctuating pattern that can be established (S2221: Yes), the display conversation notice process is executed (S2209). Since this display conversation notice process (FIGS. 36 (a), S2209) is almost the same process as that already described in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted, but the previous stop symbol will be used. Corresponding, the setting of the conversation notice that the conversation notice is established is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2221 when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is other than the fluctuation pattern in which the conversation notice can be established (S2221: No), the display conversation dummy notice process is executed (S2222).

Here, the display conversation dummy advance notice process (S2222) will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (b). FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing this display conversation dummy advance notice process (S2222). In this display conversation dummy notice process (S2222), a process of setting display mode data in which the content of the conversation notice is not established in the conversation notice of the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation is executed.

In this display conversation dummy notice processing (S2222), first, a conversation dummy notice data table corresponding to the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation is set (S2311). The conversation dummy notice data table has the same configuration as the conversation notice data table of the first embodiment, and is set so that the conversation notice is not established as shown in FIG. 45 (c).

The transfer data table corresponding to the conversation dummy notice data table set in the process of S2311 is determined (selected) and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2312). Then, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the conversation dummy notice data table set by the process of S2311 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the other conversation dummy notice data table is set to off (S2313). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2313, it is easy to determine which notice content the conversation dummy notice data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Can be judged.

Next, based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the conversation dummy notice data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2311, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2314), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S2315). After that, the display conversation dummy notice process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After the processes of S2209 and S2222 are executed, or when it is determined in the process of S2220 that the stop symbol history flag 233m is off (S2220: No), the process of S2223 is executed.

In the process of S2223, the stop symbol history flag 233m is set to off (S2223). After that, the variation pattern command processing is executed (S2205). Since this variation pattern command process (FIG. 35 (a), S2205) is the same process as the process already described in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After the process of S2205 is executed, the process of S2201 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2204, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether the display stop type command has been received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2204: No). S2206). If it is determined that the display stop type command has been received (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process 2 is executed (S2215).

Here, the stop type command process 2 (S2215) will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (a). FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the stop type command process 2 (S2215). The stop type command process 2 (S2215) executed by the MPU 231 on the display control device 114 in the second embodiment is from S241 to S2411 with respect to the stop type command process (FIGS. 35 (b) and S2207) in the first embodiment. Each process of is added. In each process from S240 to S2403, the same process as the stop type command process (FIGS. 35 (b) and S2207) of the first embodiment is executed.

After the process of S2402 is executed, the process of S2410 is executed. In the process of S2410, it is determined whether the combination of the stop symbols to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a combination capable of giving a conversation notice (S2410). When it is determined that the combination is capable of giving a conversation notice (S2410: Yes), the stop symbol history flag 233m is set to ON (S2411). On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop symbol is a combination in which the conversation cannot be announced (S2410), the process of S2403 is executed.

In this way, when the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not to execute the conversation notice in the next variation by determining whether the stop symbol is a stop symbol capable of giving a conversation notice. ..

As described above, in the second embodiment, since the conversation notice is executed by using the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the lottery result is out of order. , It is possible to make the player expect that the conversation notice will be executed. In addition, when the content of the conversation notice is established, the player can expect a big hit, so that the player can expect the content of the conversation notice to be established and become a big hit across the two fluctuations. it can.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a case where the conversation notice is executed when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the conversation notice variation pattern has been described. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in that when the fluctuation starts, the next fluctuation is pre-read, and if it is a conversation notice fluctuation pattern, the conversation notice is set. The same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment>
The main process (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51.

In the main process (see FIG. 51) in the third embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) becomes the command determination process 2 (FIG. 52, S1420) with respect to the main process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. , The variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) has been changed to the variable display setting process 3 (S1330), respectively. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

The command determination process 2 (S1420) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1420). The processes of S1421 to S1423, S1425 to S1430, and S1433 of the command determination process 2 (S1420) in the second embodiment are S1401 to S1403, S1405 to S1410 of the command determination process (FIGS. 29, S1311) in the first embodiment. The same process as each process of S1419 is executed. Further, in the command determination process 2 (FIG. 52, S1420) in the second embodiment, the processes S1423 to S1424 and S1431 to S1432 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) in the first embodiment. ing.

After the process of S1423 is executed, the process of S1424 is executed. In the process of S1424, the lottery result of the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received this time is out of order, and the fluctuation that starts to fluctuate next (the fluctuation for the lottery stored in the reserved first area) is a conversation. It is determined whether the pattern is a notice variation pattern (S1424). Here, the type of fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation to be started next is determined based on the information stored in the prize information storage area 223a based on the prize information command output from the main control device 110. ..

In the process of S1424, when the fluctuation of this time is out of the question and the fluctuation pattern of the next fluctuation is determined to be the conversation notice fluctuation pattern (S1424: Yes), the display conversation notice command is set (S1425). ..

As the display conversation notice command set here, if the conversation notice fluctuation pattern of the next variation is the fluctuation pattern of the conversation notice establishment, the command indicating that the conversation notice is established is set. By setting the display conversation notice command indicating the establishment of the conversation notice, the notice display as shown in FIG. 45B is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if the conversation notice variation pattern of the next variation is a conversation advance notice variation pattern in which the conversation advance notice is not established, a display conversation advance notice command indicating that the conversation advance notice is not established is set. By setting the display conversation notice command indicating that the conversation notice has not been established, the notice display as shown in FIG. 45 (c) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c) were displayed as variation 2 in the second embodiment, but are shown in FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b) in the third embodiment. As shown above, it is displayed from the temporary suspension of fluctuation of fluctuation 1 to the start of fluctuation of the next fluctuation.

Note that the conversation notice display is different from the first embodiment, and only the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 50 (a), the conversation notice effect (see FIGS. 6 (c) and 7 (a)) displayed when the conversation notice is established is from the symbol low-speed fluctuation period to the symbol high-speed fluctuation period of fluctuation 2. It is displayed by setting a conversation notice command for display indicating execution of the conversation notice effect at the start of the change of the change 2 in the period from the above to the end of the low-speed fluctuation period of the symbol. In the third embodiment, the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 is provided with separate data tables for the conversation notice and the conversation notice effect as the conversation notice data table.

In the present embodiment, the conversation notice is set for each of the variation 1 and the variation 2, but the conversation notice data table is not limited to this, and the conversation notice and the conversation notice effect are produced as in the first embodiment. Is displayed by setting one conversation notice data table. In the notice display when the conversation notice is established, the period from the temporary stop of the fluctuation of the fluctuation 1 to the end of the low-speed fluctuation period of the symbol of the fluctuation 2 It may be configured to be displayed across. With this configuration, the process of setting the conversation notice data table can be simplified.

On the other hand, in the process of S1429, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1429: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1431). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S1431: Yes), the information indicated by the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the reserved ball (S1432). The winning information command output from the main control device 110 is configured so that the type of the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of the fluctuation can be discriminated from the result of the winning / failing determination.

In the present embodiment, the winning information command is configured so that the winning / failing judgment result and the type of the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of the fluctuation can be discriminated, but the winning information command is not limited to the winning / failing judgment result and the conversation notice fluctuation pattern. It may be configured so that some information of the fluctuation pattern type such as whether or not it can be discriminated. With this configuration, the winning information command can be simplified. Therefore, the control load required for the command discrimination process can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the variation display setting process 3 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 3 (S1330). In the variation display setting process 3 (FIG. 53, S1330) in the third embodiment, each process from S1509 to S1512 is in S1513 to S1515 with respect to the variation display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) in the first embodiment. It has been changed to each process. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

After the process of S1508 is executed, the process of S1513 is executed. In the process of S1513, it is determined whether or not the display conversation notice command is set in S1425 of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 52, S1420) (S1513). If it is determined that the display conversation notice command has not been set (S1513: No), the display stop type command is set (S1514). On the other hand, when it is determined that the display conversation notice command has been set (S1513: Yes), the display conversation notice dedicated stop type command is set (S1515).

As described above, in the variable display setting process 3 (FIG. 53, S1330) in the third embodiment, when the display conversation notice command is set, the stop symbol is set by setting the display conversation notice dedicated stop type command. It can be matched with the displayed conversation notice command. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the content of the conversation notice and the stop symbol do not match.

Next, the variation pattern command process 2 (S2220) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process 2 (S2220). In the variation pattern command process 2 (FIG. 54, S2220) in the third embodiment, the processes of S2310 and S2311 are added to the variation pattern command process (FIG. 35, S2205) in the first embodiment, respectively. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

After the process of S2306 is executed, the process of S2310 is executed. In the process of S2310, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern that starts to fluctuate is the conversation notice fluctuation pattern that is set when the conversation notice is established (S2310). When it is determined that the conversation notice fluctuation pattern is set when the conversation notice is established (S2310: Yes), the conversation notice data table of the conversation notice effect corresponding to the conversation notice displayed in the previous fluctuation is displayed data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2311). Although omitted in the present embodiment, similar to each process from S2302 to S2305, processing such as setting a rolling data table corresponding to the set conversation notice data table and initializing the pointer is executed. Will be done.

With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 50A, the conversation notice data table corresponding to this conversation notice effect is set at the start of the change of the change 2, so that the symbol low-speed fluctuation period starts from the start of the change. The conversation notice effect is displayed until the end of. Therefore, even if the fluctuation 1 of the previous fluctuation is a fluctuation in which the lottery result is out of order, the player can enjoy the conversation notice by the symbol displayed when the fluctuation is stopped, and the content of the conversation notice is established. If there is, you can enjoy it with the expectation of a conversation notice production to see if the reach will be established in the next fluctuation. Therefore, the player can be entertained across a plurality of fluctuations, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), the conversation notice effect displayed when the conversation notice is established is displayed from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the low-speed symbol fluctuation period. Since it is set, when the reach is established, the reach effect can be shown to the player after notifying the player that the reach will be achieved by the conversation notice effect. In addition, when the reach is not reached, the temporary stop is changed as it is, and the player can be notified that the lottery result is out of order.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a case where the conversation notice is executed when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the conversation notice variation pattern has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern for the next fluctuation is pre-read and discriminated, and in the case of super reach, the notice display of the conversation notice is executed. It differs from the first embodiment. It is different from the third embodiment in that the conversation notice variation pattern is not provided in the fourth embodiment. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a time chart when the conversation notice in the fourth embodiment is executed. The time chart of the conversation notice in the third embodiment is that the conversation notice effect executed when the conversation notice is established is executed only for a predetermined period from the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation 2 to the end of the low-speed fluctuation period of the symbol. It differs in that. That is, in the third embodiment, since the conversation notice fluctuation pattern is set exclusively as the conversation notice fluctuation pattern, the period from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the symbol low-speed fluctuation period is set according to the conversation notice fluctuation pattern in advance. This is because, in contrast to the setting, in the fourth embodiment, since it is a normal super reach fluctuation pattern, the period from the start of fluctuation to the end of the low-speed symbol fluctuation period differs depending on the fluctuation pattern. .. Therefore, after all the conversation notice effects are displayed, if the symbol is in a fluctuating period (before the reach state is reached), the display mode in which the symbol is changed and the reach is reached is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the display time of the conversation notice effect is not configured to match the period from the start of the fluctuation of the super reach fluctuation pattern to the end of the symbol low-speed fluctuation period, but the conversation notice effect is not limited to this. A plurality of conversation notice effects having different display times may be set, and the conversation notice effect may be selected according to the selected super reach display mode.

<About the Electrical Configuration of the Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in the Fourth Embodiment>
FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. To the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, a conversation notice effect counter 223f is added to the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The conversation notice effect counter 223f is a counter indicating how many times the special symbol has started to fluctuate since the conversation notice was set. The initial value of the conversation notice effect counter 223f at the time of turning on the power is set to 0, set to 1 in the process of S1446 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440), and then the variable display setting process 4 (FIG. FIG. 59, S1340) 1 is added in the process of S1521. On the other hand, in the process of S1524, the initial value is reset to 0.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 57, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this main process. In the main process (see FIG. 57) in the fourth embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) is the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440) with respect to the main process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. ), The variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed to the variable display setting process 4 (FIG. 59, S1340), respectively. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

Next, the command determination process 3 (S1440) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S1440). The processes of S1441 to S1443, S1447 to S1451, and S1454 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440) in the fourth embodiment are S1401 to S1403, S1406 of the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) in the first embodiment. ~ S1410, the same process as S1419 is executed. The processes of S1452 to S1453 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440) of the fourth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1431 to S1432 of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 52, S1420) of the third embodiment. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted.

After the process of S1443 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440) in the fourth embodiment is executed, the process of S1444 is executed. In the process of S1444, the lottery result of the current fluctuation pattern received is out of order, and it is determined whether the type of the fluctuation pattern of the next fluctuation is super reach (S1444). If the lottery result of the current fluctuation pattern is out of order and it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the next fluctuation is super reach (S1444: Yes), the display conversation notice command is set (S1445). The value of the conversation notice effect counter 223f is set to 1 (S1446). On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of this time is a hit or the fluctuation pattern of the next fluctuation is determined to be a fluctuation pattern other than super reach (S1444: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, when it is determined from the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a that the fluctuation of the super reach starts to fluctuate next time, if the lottery result of the fluctuation fluctuating this time is out of order, the conversation notice is displayed. Is displayed at the time of temporary suspension of fluctuation 1 as shown in FIG. 55. As the conversation notice displayed here, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), a conversation-only conversation notice is displayed. Therefore, the player can quickly determine that the fluctuation of the super reach will be started next when the conversation notice is executed. Therefore, even if the lottery result is changed, the game can be played with the expectation that the conversation notice will be executed.

In the present embodiment, by giving a conversation notice on the condition that the next fluctuation is super reach, it is not necessary to set a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the conversation notice, and the number of fluctuation patterns can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, if the fluctuation of the current fluctuation is out of the range and the fluctuation pattern of the next fluctuation is Super Reach, the conversation notice is executed. If the fluctuation pattern is super reach, a lottery with a predetermined lottery probability may be executed, and if the lottery result is a win, a conversation notice may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the conversation notice is executed and prevent the player from getting tired of the conversation notice at an early stage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the content of the conversation notice is established and all are configured to reach in the conversation notice production, but the following changes are not limited to this, as in the first to third embodiments. It may be configured to execute even an out-of-range fluctuation pattern that does not reach, and in that case, display a notice display (see FIG. 45 (c)) in which the conversation notice is not established.

Next, the variation display setting process 4 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 4 (S1340). In the variation display setting process 4 (FIG. 59, S1340) in the fourth embodiment, each process from S152 to S1524 is added to the variation display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

After S1511 or S1512 is executed, the process of S1520 is executed. In the process of S1520, it is determined whether the value of the conversation notice effect counter 223f is 1 (S1520). The conversation notice effect counter 223f is set to 1 when the display conversation notice command is set in the process of S1446 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440), so that the conversation notice effect counter 223f is 1. This indicates that the display conversation warning command has been set.

When it is determined that the conversation notice counter 223f is 1, (S1520: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the conversation notice effect counter 223f. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the conversation advance notice effect counter 223f is not 1 (S1520: No), it is determined whether the value of the conversation advance notice effect counter 223f is 2 (S1522). When it is determined that the value of the conversation notice effect counter 223f is 2 (S1522: Yes), the display conversation notice effect command is set (S1523). After that, the value of the conversation notice effect counter 223f is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1524). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the conversation notice counter 223f is not 2, (S1522: No), this process ends.

In this way, if the conversation notice effect counter 223f is 2, it indicates that the display conversation notice command is the next change after the set change. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55, when the change 2 starts to change. A display conversation notice effect command is set to display the conversation notice effect. Therefore, the conversation notice effect (see FIGS. 6 (c) and 7 (a)) corresponding to the conversation notice can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the start of fluctuation.

Next, the command determination process 3 (S2120) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S2120). In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 60, S2120) in the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern command process (FIGS. 35 (a), S2205) varies with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment. The pattern command process 2 (FIG. 54, S2220) has been changed, and the processes of S2240 and S2241 have been added, respectively. Since the variation pattern command process 2 (FIG. 54, S2220) is the same process as the process described in the third embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S2210 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 60, S2120) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type command for display conversation notice is not received (S2210: No), the process of S2240. Is executed. In the process of S2240, it is determined whether or not the display conversation notice effect command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2240). If it is determined that the display conversation notice effect command has been received (S2240: Yes), the conversation notice effect process is executed (S2241).

Here, the conversation notice effect processing (S2241) will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this conversation notice effect processing (S2241).

In the conversation notice effect processing (FIGS. 61, S2241), first, the conversation advance notice effect data table corresponding to the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). The conversation notice effect data table is the same as the conversation advance notice data table in the first embodiment in which only the conversation notice effect is individually extracted and set. In the third embodiment, the conversation notice data table is set individually for the conversation notice and the conversation notice effect, but the conversation notice data table dedicated to the conversation notice effect of the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment are configured. It has the same configuration as the conversation notice effect data table in the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 45B, the conversation notice data table in the fourth embodiment is a data table in which display data of only the conversation notice is set.

The transfer data table corresponding to the conversation notice effect data table set in the process of S2801 is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802). The data table determination flag is set to on (S2803), the time data is set to the time counter 233h (S2804) based on the set data table, the pointer 233f is initialized (S2805), and this process is terminated.

By configuring as in the fourth embodiment, the conversation notice can be executed without setting the conversation notice fluctuation pattern dedicated to the conversation notice in advance. Therefore, the number of fluctuation patterns can be reduced.

In addition, even if the lottery result is out of order, it can be expected that the conversation notice will be executed. Therefore, even if the lottery result is wrong, the player can be entertained, and the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

In the second to fourth embodiments, the stop symbol on which the conversation notice is executed has been described in the case where the left symbol and the right symbol have different display modes (reach display mode), but the present invention is not limited to the reach display. It may be a display mode of a stop symbol that is out of reach when it is out of the mode, or it may be a display mode that shows a big hit after a big hit. In such a case, for example, in a conversation notice that is out of reach, a special conversation content such as a brother's conversation is displayed because it has the same pattern, and the probability that the fluctuation is reach is higher than in other cases. It may be set to be high (in the case of reach, it is easy to execute a conversation notice with a stop symbol that is out of reach). By doing so, it is possible to expect the player to execute the conversation notice regardless of the stop pattern. In addition, when the conversation notice is executed from the big hit symbol after the big hit, the conversation notice is executed by the first change after the big hit by making it easy to execute when the fluctuation is the big hit, and the big hit is continuous. The player can greatly expect that the game will be, and the game can be enjoyed even after the big hit.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a case where the conversation notice is executed when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the conversation notice variation pattern has been described. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the conversation notice is executed, balls having different colors are displayed, one of them is selected by lottery, and the conversation notice is moved toward the comment window. The difference is that the background of the comment window changes to the color of the sphere upon contact. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Characteristics of conversation notice in the fifth embodiment>
62 (a) and 62 (b) show the conversation notice in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62A, when the conversation notice is displayed, four spheres Q1 to Q4 having different colors are displayed. Specifically, the sphere Q1 is a blue sphere, the sphere Q2 is a yellow sphere, the sphere Q3 is a green sphere, and the sphere Q4 is a red sphere. At the same time as the comment is displayed from the left symbol (the turtle symbol in FIG. 62 (a)), the effect display in which the sphere Q1 moves is displayed in the comment window displaying the comment, and when the comment window is touched, the figure is shown. As shown in 62 (b), the color of the comment window is changed to blue, which is the same as the color of the sphere Q1.

Which of the balls Q1 to Q4 is to be moved toward the comment window is determined by lottery based on the selected fluctuation pattern. The probability that the red ball Q4 is selected when the lottery result of the fluctuation pattern is the most successful is set to be high, and then the green ball Q3, the yellow ball Q2, and the blue ball Q1 are judged in this order. The probability of being selected when the result is a big hit is set high.

With this configuration, the red ball Q1 is selected and the comment window changes to red, so that the player can expect to be a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, these four balls are displayed each time, but some of them may be displayed by lottery or the like. For example, a plurality of blue balls Q1 may be displayed. (For example, four) may be displayed, or three blue spheres Q1 may be displayed and one red sphere Q4 may be displayed in different variations. With this configuration, if the red sphere Q4 and the like, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot, are included, it is possible to expect the red sphere Q4 to move. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game to see which ball is displayed.

FIG. 63A is a diagram schematically showing a display effect selection table 1 which is a kind of display effect selection table 234a5 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. The display effect selection table 1 is a selection table for determining the effect color (selection color) of the spheres Q1 to Q4 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the conversation notice that move to the comment window. is there. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), a display effect counter for each effect color corresponds to the variation pattern (here, the variation pattern is schematically displayed as Nos. 1 to 7 for the sake of simplicity). 233k is assigned. Although the details will be described later, the effect color selected in the display effect selection table 1 is temporarily stored in the area 0 (not shown) of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. Areas 0 to 3 (not shown) are set in the work RAM 233 in advance as storage areas for determining the effect colors of the spheres Q1 to Q4. Further, details of how to determine the effect color of each of the spheres Q1 to Q4 will be described later.

In addition, No. of the display effect selection table 234a5. 1-No. The conversation notice fluctuation pattern shown in 4 is an out-of-conversation notice fluctuation pattern in which the lottery result is out of order. 6 to No. Reference numeral 7 denotes a winning conversation notice fluctuation pattern in which the lottery result is a hit. For example, No. of the out-of-conversation notice fluctuation pattern. When 4 is selected and the value of the display effect counter 233k is 30, the yellow sphere Q2 is selected.

FIG. 63B is a diagram schematically showing a display effect selection table 2 which is a kind of display effect selection table 234a5 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. In the display effect selection table 2, among the four effect colors of the spheres Q1 to Q4, the combination pattern of the three effect colors excluding the effect color determined in the display effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 63 (a)). It is a selection table for determining.

As shown in FIG. 63B, each combination of effect colors is set, and the value of the display effect counter 233k is assigned to each pattern for each variation pattern. For example, the selected fluctuation pattern is No. When the fluctuation pattern of 1 (disappearing conversation notice fluctuation pattern) and the value of the display effect counter 233k is 70, pattern 2 (blue: yellow: green) is selected. When the pattern 2 is selected, data showing the effect colors of blue in the area 1 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, yellow in the area 2, and green in the area 3 are stored. Although the details will be described later, in the process of S2515 of the display conversation advance notice process 2 (S2250, FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the areas 0 to 3 are in which of the spheres Q1 to Q4, respectively. The process of determining whether to correspond is executed. In the case of pattern 2, data indicating blue in area 1, yellow in area 2, and green in area 3 are set. Similarly, in the patterns 3 to 5, the areas 1 to 3 are set in order from the left color shown in the display effect selection table 2 (FIG. 63 (b)).

By configuring in this way, even if the same combination of effect colors is selected for areas 0 to 3, the positions of the effect colors displayed on the spheres Q1 to Q4 can be set differently. Among the balls Q1 to Q4, the same ball moves to the comment window every time, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the moving ball is determined before the ball moves by the player. In addition, the combination of the positions of the effect colors displayed on the balls Q1 to Q4 can be randomized, and the player can perform a fresh effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<About the conversation notice data table in the fifth embodiment>
FIG. 64 is a data table for displaying a conversation notice, a conversation notice effect, and a notice effect of the balls Q1 to Q4 by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the conversation notice data table of the first embodiment is that in the conversation notice data table of the fifth embodiment, the display data (ball display information) for displaying the notice effect of the balls Q1 to Q4 and the ball Q1 The difference is that one of the balls Q4 is selected and moved, and the display data of the effect of changing the background color of the comment window is set.

It should be noted that the information of each effect color of the spheres Q1 to Q4 can be selected by selecting from the display effect selection table 1 (see 63 (a)) and the display effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 63 (b)) described above. , The information of the selected color determined by the display effect selection table 1 (FIG. 63 (a)) is set as the sphere display information (with movement) and the selected color of the background of the comment window.

In the example of the conversation notice data table of FIG. 64, at the address 0032H, the symbol data of the balls Q1 to Q4 and data such as the display position, the enlargement ratio, and the respective effect colors are set as the ball notice. At address 0064H, in addition to the same ball display information as address 0032H, the comment content (display character information), display position information (X, Y), and the color information of the background color of the comment window are set for the comment of the conversation notice. .. The display color normally shown is white. At the address 0906H, as the ball display information, as shown in FIG. 62B, the display information after the set ball of the balls Q1 to Q4 has moved is set. Regarding the movement of the sphere, the information that the sphere has moved to the comment window little by little up to the address of 0906H is set, so that the display is set to move. Further, display data is set in which the background color of the comment window is the selected color (the effect color selected in the display effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 64A)).

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment>
FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. In the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment, a display effect counter 233k is added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment.

The display effect counter 233k is a counter used when deciding which of the balls Q1 to Q4 displayed in the notice display of the conversation notice displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to move to the comment window. .. The display effect counter 233k is acquired in the process of the display conversation advance notice process (FIG. 68, S2511) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Further, in the process of S2107 of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, 1 is added and updated. The initial value is set to 0, the upper limit value is 99, and when it is updated to 99 and further updated, it is updated to 0, which is the initial value.

Further, to the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment, the display effect selection table 234a5 is added to the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment. Since the display effect selection table 234a5 has been described above with reference to FIG. 63, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment>
The command determination process 4 (S2130) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 4 (S2130). In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 66, S2130) in the fifth embodiment, the display conversation notice process (FIG. 36, S2209) is the display conversation with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment. It has been changed to advance notice processing 2 (FIG. 67, S2250). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

The display conversation advance notice process 2 (S2250) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the display conversation advance notice process 2 (S2250).

In the display conversation advance notice process 2 (FIG. 67, S2250), first, the value of the display effect counter 233k is acquired (S2511). After that, the conversation notice data table corresponding to the conversation notice command is determined from the conversation notice selection table 234a3 (S2512). Next, based on the value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the process of S2511, the effect color corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is determined from the display effect selection table 1 (FIG. 63 (a)), and the conversation determined in S2512. It is set in the notice data table, and data indicating the selected effect color is set in the area 0 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 (S2513).

From the display effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 63 (b)) based on the remainder value of the result of adding 13 to the squared value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in S2511 and dividing by 100. A display pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is selected and set in each of the areas 1 to 3 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in order (S2514). The settings from area 1 to area 3 are set in advance for each display pattern, and among the colors shown in FIG. 63 (b), the colors are set in areas 1 to 3 in order from the left.

In this way, when the display pattern is determined from the display effect selection table 2 (FIG. 63 (b)), the value of the display effect counter 233k is squared, 13 is added, and the remainder is divided by 100. By configuring so as to select, it is possible to prevent a problem that the combination of the effect color and the display pattern selected from the display effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 63A) becomes the same every time. Further, by calculating different values from the same counter, the number of counters can be reduced and the amount of data can be reduced.

Divide the value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the processing of S2511 by 4, set the corresponding spheres Q1 to Q4 in areas 0 to 3 based on the remaining value, and determine in the processing of S2512. The information of the spheres Q1 to Q4 is set in the conversation notice data table, and the conversation notice data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2515). The method of determining the spheres Q1 to Q4 corresponding to the areas 0 to 3 is processed as follows. The remainder values 0 to 3 are preset so as to correspond to the areas 0 to 3, respectively. Areas 0 to 3 are assigned to spheres Q1 to Q4 in ascending order from the remainder value.

Specifically, assuming that the remainder value is 3, the data in area 3 is assigned to sphere Q1, the data in area 0 is assigned to sphere Q2, the data in area 1 is assigned to sphere Q3, and the data in area 2 is assigned to sphere Q4. To.

With this configuration, the effect colors displayed on the spheres Q1 to Q4 can be made random. Therefore, even when the same color combination is selected, the combination of the color positions displayed on the spheres Q1 to Q4 can be made different, and the display mode can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The transfer data table corresponding to the conversation notice data table set in the process of S2515 is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2516). The data table discrimination flag is set to on (S2517), the time data is set to the time counter 233h based on the data table (S2518), the pointer 233f is initialized (S2519), and this process is terminated.

As described above, as the selection color to be moved to the comment window, the red effect color is more easily selected in the big hit conversation notice variation pattern than in the out-of-order conversation notice variation pattern. Therefore, when the red ball is displayed and the player moves to the comment window, the player can raise the expectation for the big hit.

Further, since it is determined that the balls to be moved to the comment window are random among the balls Q1 to Q4, the player first displays the balls Q1 to Q4, and moves in the case of a big hit. If there is a display color of a ball with a high probability of playing, the game can be played with the expectation that the ball will move to the comment window.

Also, regarding the combination of the display colors of the spheres Q1 to Q4, the jackpot conversation notice variation pattern is configured so that more combinations having three or more red colors are selected than the out-of-order conversation notice variation pattern. The player can have an expectation for a big hit from the color combination of the displayed balls Q1 to Q4.

In the fifth embodiment, the spheres Q1 to Q4 are displayed as the warning symbols, and the background color of the comment window is changed by one of the colors, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a hold display mode indicating the number of hold balls, "●" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the number of hold balls, and the information in the winning information storage area 223a is determined before the start of fluctuation. , The color of the hold display is changed based on the information. At the start of fluctuation, the color of the comment window may be changed according to the color. When determining the color of the hold display, as in the fifth embodiment, when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, the player can display the red color by setting a high probability that the red color is selected. Once done, you can have expectations for a big hit. Further, at the start of the fluctuation, the comment window of the conversation notice changes to that color, so that even if the change in the color of the hold display is overlooked, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

<About a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 70. In the fifth embodiment, the effect color to be moved to the comment window is selected, and then the colors of the remaining spheres are determined. However, in the modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the spheres Q1 to Q4 are displayed. The difference is that the process of determining each color and then determining the effect color to be moved to the comment window is executed. The same elements as those in the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 68 is a diagram schematically showing a display effect selection table 3 which is a kind of display effect selection table 234a5 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. In the display effect selection table 3, the value of the display effect counter 233k is assigned to each combination of the display colors of the spheres Q1 to Q4 according to the result of the hit / fail determination. As the display color, four combinations are set from the four colors of blue, yellow, green, and red. The numbers shown corresponding to the display colors in the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68) indicate the number of spheres of that color.

Specifically, if the hit / fail judgment result is a hit and the value of the display effect counter is 35, there are three green display colors and one red display color from the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68). Individuals are selected. Each of the selected display colors is stored in areas 0 to 3 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in a predetermined order. As the storage order, the display colors shown in the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68) are stored in areas 0 to 3 in the order of blue, yellow, green, and red. When there are three green display colors and one red display color, data of display colors indicating green in area 0, green in area 1, green in area 2, and red in area 3 are stored. To. Further, for example, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit and the display effect counter 233k is any of 41 to 55, there is one blue display color, one yellow display color, and green. One display color and one red display color are selected, and the four display colors constituting the spheres Q1 to Q4 are determined. In the modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the area 0 is set to correspond to the ball Q1, the area 1 corresponds to the ball Q2, the area 2 corresponds to the ball Q3, and the area 3 corresponds to the ball Q4 in advance. There is.

Then, according to the predetermined order described above, data showing the display colors of blue in the area 0 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, yellow in the area 1, green in the area 2, and red in the area 3 are stored.

In the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68), when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the red display color is more easily selected than when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong. .. That is, the player can have an expectation of hitting when the red display color is included in the ball Q. Therefore, by displaying the spheres Q1 to Q4, it is possible to predict whether or not the result is correct or not before being notified by the third symbol. Therefore, the player can enjoy the effect of displaying the ball Q, and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the display effect selection table 3 (FIG. 68), it is set that two or more green display colors are included in the case where the hit / fail judgment result is a hit than in the case where the result is a hit. From this, the player can predict the winning / failing determination result from the display color of the ball Q.

In addition, depending on whether the hit / fail judgment result is a hit or a miss, the display color is selected in a combination, or even if the combination is the same, the selection probability is set to be different so that the ball Q4 can be selected. It is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the winning / failing determination result from the display color.

FIG. 69 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the display effect selection table 4, which is one of the display effect selection tables 234a5 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. The display effect selection table 4 (see FIG. 69) is a data table for determining the sphere to be moved to the comment window among the spheres Q1 to Q4 determined from the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68). is there.

As shown in FIG. 69, the value of the display effect counter 233k is assigned corresponding to the areas 0 to 3 separately for the case where the hit / fail determination result is a hit and the case where the hit / fail judgment result is a hit. Specifically, if the hit / fail determination result is a hit and the value of the acquired display effect counter 233k is 35, the area 1, that is, the sphere Q2 is determined to be the sphere (selected color) that moves to the comment window. It should be noted that the values of the display effect counters 233k in different ranges are assigned to areas 0 to 3 depending on whether the case is a hit or a hit. Further, in the case of a hit, the area 2 and the area 3, that is, the sphere Q3 and the sphere Q4 are set to be selected more easily than in the case of being off.

With this configuration, the selected sphere can be easily set differently depending on whether it is a hit or a miss. Therefore, the result of the hit / fail determination can be predicted from the selected sphere.

Further, in the case of a hit, the area 2 and the area 3 are configured to be easier to be selected than in the case of the out-of-area, so that the area 2 and the area 3 are displayed in green or red according to a predetermined storage order. Since it is configured to be easily stored, the red or green display color is easily selected as the display color to move to the comment window. Therefore, the hit / fail determination result can be easily predicted from the display color of the ball Q moving to the comment window, and new enjoyment can be given to the player.

<Control processing executed by the display control device 114 in the modified example of the fifth embodiment>
In the modified example of the fifth embodiment, the display conversation advance notice process 2 (FIG. 67, S2250) of the command determination process 4 (FIG. 66, S2130) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment is for display. It is changed to conversation notice processing 3 (FIG. 70, S2260). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the fifth embodiment are executed, and therefore the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 70, a display conversation notice process 3 (S2260) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the display conversation advance notice process 3 (S2260).

In the display conversation notice process 3 (FIG. 70, S2260), the value of the display effect counter 233k is first acquired (S2521). After that, the conversation notice data table corresponding to the conversation notice command is determined from the conversation notice selection table 234a3 (S2522). Next, based on the value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the process of S2521, a display color corresponding to the hit / fail determination result is selected from the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68), and the work of the display control device 114 The RAM 233 is stored in areas 0 to 3 in a predetermined order. Here, the predetermined order is stored in the order of the display colors shown in the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68) from the area 0 to the area 3 in ascending order (S2523).

From the display effect selection table 4 (see FIG. 69), any of areas 0 to 3 based on the remainder value of the result of dividing the value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the process of S2521 by 4. Is selected, and the selection result is set as the selection color of any of the spheres Q1 to Q4 to be moved to the comment window (S2524).

The display colors of the spheres Q1 to Q4 determined by the processing of S2523 and the spheres (selected colors) to move to the comment window determined by the processing of S2524 are set in the conversation notice data table determined by the processing of S2522, respectively. (S2525).

The transfer data table corresponding to the conversation notice data table set in the process of S2522 is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2526). The data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S2527), the time data is set to the time counter 233h based on the data table (S2528), the pointer 233f is initialized (S2529), and this process is terminated.

In this way, by first determining each display color of the spheres Q1 to Q4 and then determining the sphere (selected color) to move to the comment window, the comment window of the spheres Q1 to Q4 is displayed. The selected color to be moved can be set at random.

Further, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, red is easily selected as the selected display color, and even with the selected color, the red display color is easily determined as compared with the case where the sphere Q4 is easily determined. Therefore, by displaying the red color, the player can have an expectation for a big hit. Furthermore, by moving the sphere of the red display color to the comment window, the expectation for the big hit can be further amplified.

Further, by moving the sphere Q4 to the comment window, even if the color of the sphere Q4 is a display color other than red, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation for a big hit, and the spheres Q1 to Q4 are red. Even if the display color is not included, the player can have an expectation for a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player loses the expectation for the jackpot from the display colors of the balls Q1 to Q4 and is disappointed at an early stage.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the conversation notice executed when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the conversation notice fluctuation pattern, the conversation notice is executed when the content of the conversation is established with the predetermined contents. The case where the production is executed has been described. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, in the conversation notice, when the content of the conversation is established, the effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22 is executed, and whether or not the conversation notice effect is executed. The difference is that the process of notifying is executed. Further, in the first embodiment, among the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped, a comment indicating the content of the conversation is displayed from the left symbol, and then a comment indicating the content of the conversation is displayed. A comment indicating the content of the conversation is displayed from the right symbol, but in the sixth embodiment, the left symbol is stopped, the middle symbol and the right symbol are scrolled (variable display), and the left symbol is displayed. The difference is that a comment indicating the content of the conversation notice is displayed from the symbol, then the right symbol is stopped and displayed, and a comment indicating the content of the conversation notice is displayed from the right symbol. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

71 (a) to (c) and 72 (a) to (c) are diagrams showing a display mode of a conversation notice displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 71A shows a state in which the third symbol starts the variation display, the left symbol is stopped and displayed, and the comment which is the content of the conversation is displayed in the variation mode of the third symbol in the conversation notice variation pattern. It is a figure which showed. In this case, the middle symbol and the right symbol are scrolled from the top to the bottom of the third symbol at high speed or low speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the right symbol is stopped and displayed, and the content of the conversation is displayed. In the case of FIG. 71 (b), the conversation content of the right symbol is "OK !!" for the conversation content of the left symbol "Let's compete?" Indicates the case where is satisfied. On the other hand, FIG. 72 (c) shows a case where even if the right symbol is stopped, the comment of the conversation content is not displayed from the right symbol and the comment is not established. In this way, when the conversation is not established, the middle symbol is subsequently stopped and displayed at one of the symbols, and it is notified that the hit / miss determination result is incorrect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), after the conversation is established, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the character "press the button!" That notifies the player to press the frame button 22! Is displayed. Further, at this time, since the variable display of the middle symbol disappears or is hidden by the characters, two "○" are displayed at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol is blinked alternately. It is configured to notify that the symbol is changing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), when the frame button 22 is pressed, the "competition effect" shown in FIG. 6 (c), which is a conversation notice effect, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The characters "Successful competition production" are displayed. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is such that the conversation notice effect is not executed even if the conversation is established, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the player is notified that the conversation notice effect is not executed. Characters are displayed.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the display mode in which the conversation is established even if the conversation advance notice effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that many effects in which the conversation is not established are displayed.

Further, when the conversation is established, the player can feel that the lottery is performed by pressing the frame button 22 to determine whether or not the conversation notice effect is executed, and the frame button 22 is pressed. It is possible to give the player the pleasure of playing.

In the present embodiment, when the conversation is established, the frame button 22 is pressed to notify that the conversation notice effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame button 22 is pressed. , The value of the display effect counter 233k may be acquired, it may be determined whether the value is a predetermined hit value, and if it is a hit, the conversation notice effect may be executed. In this case, the conversation notice variation pattern is configured to be established regardless of whether or not the conversation notice effect is executed, and data tables for displaying the conversation notice and the conversation notice effect are set separately. When the conversation notice effect is executed, the data table dedicated to the conversation notice effect is set, but when the conversation notice effect is not executed, the display set in the conversation notice variation pattern display data table is set. The display content based on the data may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

With this configuration, it is possible to randomly determine whether or not the conversation notice effect is executed, and the player can enjoy the variation of the conversation notice variation pattern in various patterns.

<About the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a block diagram of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment.

In the display control device 114 of the sixth embodiment, the button pressing flag 233n and the button effect flag 233p are added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, respectively, with respect to the first embodiment.

The button pressing flag 233n is a flag indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed. The button pressing flag 233n is pressed (operated) by the voice lamp control device 113 during the valid period in the process of S2271 of the command determination process 5 (FIG. 75, S2140) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is set to ON when a button press command that is output based on the above is received. On the other hand, it is set to off in the process of S3056 of the button pressing effect process (FIG. 77, S3050) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The button pressing flag 233n is set to off in the initial setting executed when the power is turned on or the like.

The button effect flag 233p is a flag indicating that the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is a button valid period (set based on the conversation notice variation pattern) that is effectively set. This button effect flag 233p is set to ON based on the start timing of the button validity period in the process of S3052 of the button press effect process (FIG. 77, S3050) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. On the other hand, in the process of S3059, it is set to off based on the end of the button validity period.

<Control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 74, a frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 on the voice lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 74, S1307), first, it is determined whether the value of the SW effective time counter (not shown) is 0 (S1341). The SW effective time counter is a counter provided in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is a counter for counting the effective time of the frame button 22. In addition, this SW effective time counter is automatically set when a fluctuation pattern (in this embodiment, a conversation notice fluctuation pattern of hit or miss) in which a button validity period for validating the frame button 22 is set in advance. Is set.

If it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter is 0 in the process of S1341 (S1341: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter is larger than 0 (S1341: No), the value of the SW effective time counter is subtracted by 1 (S1342). It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) (S1343). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1343: Yes), a button pressing command is set (S1344). After that, the value of the SW effective time counter is set to 0 (S1345). On the other hand, in the process of S1343, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1343: No), this process is terminated.

As for the other control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment, the same processes as the control processes in the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control device 114 in the sixth embodiment>
In the V interrupt processing (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the sixth embodiment, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 33 (b)). The command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) and the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103), which are one of the processes in (), are the command determination process 5 (FIG. 75, S2140) and the display setting process 2 (FIG. 76, S2180). Each has been changed to. As for other processes, the same processes as those executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 5 (S2140) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 5 (S2140). In the command determination process 5 (FIG. 75, S2140) in the sixth embodiment, each process of S2270 to S2271 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment. In addition, the processes S2201 to S2213 and S2219 in the sixth embodiment are the same as the processes S2201 to S2213 and S2219 in the first embodiment.

In the process of S2210, when it is determined that the stop type command for display conversation notice is not received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2210: No), the button press command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. Is determined (S2270). When it is determined that the button pressing command has been received (S2270: Yes), the button pressing flag 233n is set to ON (S2271). On the other hand, when it is determined that the button pressing command has not been received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2270: No), the process of S2212 is executed.

Next, the display setting process 2 (S2180) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the display setting process 2 (S2180). In the display setting process 2 (FIG. 76, S2180) in the sixth embodiment, the process of S3050 is added to the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103) in the first embodiment. Each process from S3001 to S3021 in the sixth embodiment executes the same process as each process from S3001 to S3021 in the first embodiment.

After the process of S3007 is executed, the process of S3050 is executed. In the process of S3050, the button pressing effect process is executed. The details of this button pressing effect processing (S3050) will be described with reference to FIG. 77.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a button pressing effect process (S3050), which is one process in the display setting process 2 (FIG. 76, S2180) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. To do. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this button pressing effect processing (S3050).

In the button pressing effect processing (FIG. 77, S3050), first, it is determined whether or not the button valid period has started (S3051). Whether or not the button validity period has started is preset in the display data table of the set conversation notice variation pattern, and is determined by the setting. In the process of S3051, when it is determined that the button valid period has started (S3051: Yes), the button effect flag 233p is set to ON (S3052). On the other hand, if it is determined that the button validity period has not started (S3051: No), the process of S3053 is executed.

In the process of S3053, it is determined whether the button is in the valid period (S3053). If it is determined that the button is in the valid period (S3053: Yes), it is determined whether the button pressing flag 233n is on (S3054). When it is determined that the button press flag 233n is on (S3054: Yes), the conversation notice determination data table is displayed based on the selected fluctuation pattern. The display data table buffer 233d of the work RAM 233 of the control device 114. Is set to (S3055). The conversation notice determination data table is a data table in which the notification mode of whether or not the conversation notice effect shown in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (b) is executed is set. After that, the button pressing flag 233n and the button effect flag 233p are set to off (S3056). On the other hand, in the process of S3054, when it is determined that the button pressing flag 233n is off (S3054: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S3053, when it is determined that the button is out of the valid period (S3053: No), it is determined whether the button effect flag 233p is on (S3057). When it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is on (S3057: Yes), an alternative notice display data table (not shown) is set (S3058). The alternative notice display data table is for notifying the player that the frame button 22 has not been pressed by the player during the button validity period. For example, a character or the like is displayed and the character is displayed. Is displayed on behalf of the player, such as a notification indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed. After that, the button effect flag 233p is set to off (S3059), and this process ends.

In this way, by determining whether the button effect flag 233p is set to ON even though the button is out of the valid period, it can be determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed by the player. Therefore, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, by displaying the alternative display mode, it is possible to suppress a problem that the effect of the conversation notice is not consistent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the production.

Further, regarding the process of S3057, when it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is off (S3057: No), this process is terminated.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 87. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation is the stop symbol capable of giving a conversation notice, and it is determined whether or not to execute the conversation notice in the next fluctuation, and the predetermined conversation notice is given. The case where the content (comment content) is displayed was explained. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the maximum time for displaying the conversation notice is set in advance in the conversation notice fluctuation pattern, and within that time, the player's frame button 22 It differs from the second embodiment in that it is configured to display the next set comment based on the operation. The same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the production mode of the conversation notice in the 7th embodiment>
FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c) are diagrams showing an effect mode in the conversation notice displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. In the conversation notice shown in FIG. 78 (a), the hit / fail judgment result shown in FIG. 81 is out of the question, and the conversation notice content of pattern 2 selected when the conversation notice is established or the hit / fail judgment result shown in FIG. 82 has a high probability. It is a figure which displayed the first conversation notice content determined from the conversation notice content of the pattern 2 which is selected when it is a hit to become a game state (probability change game state). FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which a comment indicating the conversation content is displayed from the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. Actually, the conversation content is displayed before the right symbol from the left symbol, and then, after a predetermined time, a comment indicating the conversation content is displayed from the right symbol. During this period, the middle symbol is scrolled from the top to the bottom at high speed or low speed.

After that, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the left symbol and the right symbol are the second of the above-mentioned pattern 2 in the conversation notice pattern table (FIG. 81 or 82). Conversation notice content is displayed. Here, the figure in which the comment contents are displayed by the left symbol and the right symbol is shown. Actually, the comment content is displayed before the left symbol, and then, after a predetermined time, the comment of the conversation content is displayed from the right symbol.

As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the content of the conversation is established, the conversation notice effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 78 (c). In the conversation notice effect shown in FIG. 78 (b), the player is informed that the player competes to the goal with a plurality of symbols including the left symbol and the right symbol, and reaches the goal with the symbol that reaches the goal first. I am informing you. When this conversation notice effect is displayed, two "○" are displayed side by side at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81, and are alternately blinked. This is a temporary symbol of the third symbol, and by blinking the display, the player is notified that the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

Here, in the present embodiment, it is shown that the odd-numbered symbols of "1, 3, 5, 7" are given a high-probability gaming state in which the probability of determining the jackpot is higher than the normal state in the hit / fail determination after the jackpot. In the symbols, the even-numbered symbols of "2, 4, 6, 8" are set as symbols indicating that the normal gaming state, which is the normal winning / failing probability, is given even after the big hit. Therefore, the player can expect that the symbol indicating that the high-probability gaming state is given will reach the first goal by the conversation notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with an interest in which symbol wins. Therefore, it is possible to play with interest in the game until the player gets a big hit, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage.

Further, as will be described in detail later, by pressing the frame button 22, other types of comments of the left symbol and the right symbol can be displayed. Further, since the conversation notice pattern table (see FIGS. 81 and 82) is set so that the content of the selected conversation differs depending on the result of the hit / fail judgment, the player can choose between the left symbol and the right symbol depending on the content of the comment. It is possible to determine which is easier to reach the goal first.

In the seventh embodiment, when the odd-numbered symbol on the left symbol and the even-numbered symbol on the right symbol are stopped and displayed in the previous variation, the conversation notice is set to be executed, so that the player can talk about the conversation notice. If it is established, you can enjoy knowing which of the odd-numbered symbols and the even-numbered symbols will reach you by the conversation notice effect.

In the present embodiment, in the conversation notice pattern table (see FIGS. 81 and 82), comments are made up to the third conversation content, that is, until the player presses the frame button 22 twice within the maximum conversation notice period. Is configured to be changed and displayed based on the above, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be configured to be more or less.

Further, in the present embodiment, some of the preset third symbols 1 to 9 are displayed to execute the conversation notice effect. For example, the third symbols 1 to 9 are displayed. In addition to some of them, a temporary symbol or the like (for example, a character with the letter X) that does not notify whether the high-probability gaming state or the normal gaming state is given may be displayed. .. With this configuration, the reach is established with the provisional symbol, and the player can have expectations for a high-probability gaming state until the jackpot starts or the game is played after the jackpot. it can.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (b), the display period of the conversation notice and the conversation notice effect in the effect of the conversation notice in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 (a) is a time chart showing a case where the conversation notice effect of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is established, and FIG. 79 (b) is a conversation notice effect of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. It is a time chart showing the case where is not established.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the maximum conversation notice period, which is the maximum period during which the conversation notice can be executed, is set in advance in the conversation notice variation pattern in which the conversation notice is established. In the present embodiment, the maximum conversation notice period is set from the start of the fluctuation to 5 seconds before the start of the display of the reach display mode such as super reach. Therefore, the conversation notice period shown in FIG. 79 (a) is configured to be variable within the range of the maximum conversation notice period. The conversation notice period is set for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment) after the button validity period (set between the first conversation content is displayed and the maximum conversation notice period) is set. ), It is set to end when the frame button 22 is not pressed.

After that, the remaining time until the start of the reach display mode is determined, and the conversation notice effect is executed. Regarding this conversation notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (b) and FIG. 84, three types of conversation notice effects are set by the conversation notice effect data table. It is configured so that the conversation notice effect data table composed of the effect time closest to the time from the end of the conversation advance notice period to the start of the reach display mode is selected. It should be noted that the shorter the production time, the shorter the time from the display of the conversation notice effect to the goal of the symbol (faster movement speed). As for the remaining time from the goal of the symbol to the display of the reach display mode, the final display content of the goal of the symbol is repeatedly displayed.

With this configuration, it is possible to produce a conversation notice according to the player who presses the frame button 22 and the player who does not press it. Further, by pressing the frame button 22, a different effect is displayed as compared with the case where the frame button 22 is not pressed, and it is possible to give the player the pleasure of pressing the frame button 22.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the conversation notice is unsuccessful, the period from the start of fluctuation of the third symbol to the temporary stop of fluctuation is set as the maximum conversation notice period. Therefore, the conversation notice can be enjoyed until the symbol is temporarily stopped. Therefore, even if the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect, the game can be played with the expectation of a big hit by the conversation notice.

<Electrical configuration of display control device 114 in the seventh embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. FIG. 80 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the seventh embodiment. In the display control device 114 according to the seventh embodiment, a button pressing flag 233n, a button effect flag 223p, and a progress counter 233r are added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, respectively, with respect to the second embodiment. Further, in the character commission ROM 234 of the display control device 114, a conversation notice pattern table 234a6 and a conversation notice effect data table 234a7 are added, respectively. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Since the button pressing flag 233n and the button effect flag 233p are the same as those described in the sixth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The progress counter 233r is a counter for counting the time until the frame button 22 is pressed when the button validity period is set. The progress counter 233r is added one by one when it is determined that the button is in the valid period in the process of S3064 of the button pressing effect process 2 (FIG. 87, S3060) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. .. On the other hand, in the process of S3067, when it is determined that the button pressing flag 233n indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed is on, the initial value is reset to 0. The progress counter 233r is set to end the conversation notice period when it is equal to or more than a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, a count value corresponding to 5 seconds) in the process of S3065.

The conversation notice pattern table 234a6 is a data table for determining the comment content of the conversation notice. The conversation notice pattern table 234a6 is composed of the conversation notice pattern table (off) shown in FIG. 81 and the conversation notice pattern table (hit) shown in FIG. 82.

The conversation notice pattern table (missing) shown in FIG. 81 is a table selected when the winning / failing determination result is wrong. Further, the selected out-of-order conversation notice variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the conversation of the conversation notice is established or a variation pattern in which the conversation is not established. It is set. Then, the value of the display effect counter 233k is assigned to each of the patterns 1 to 3.

Specifically, for example, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect, the conversation of the conversation notice is not established, and the value of the display effect counter is 40, the conversation content of the pattern 2 Is selected. When this pattern 2 is selected, the comment "Compete together !!" is displayed from the left symbol, which is the first comment content, and then "..." from the right symbol after a predetermined time. Comment is displayed. After that, if the frame button 22 is pressed by the player within 5 seconds, the comment "Please !!" is displayed from the left symbol, which is the second comment, and then, after a predetermined time, "Please!" What should I do? "Is displayed. After that, if the frame button 22 is pressed by the player within 5 seconds, the comment "Let's do it !!" is displayed from the left symbol, and then, after a predetermined time, "Stop this time!" From the right symbol. The comment "!" Is displayed.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not pressed for 5 seconds after the first or second comment is displayed, the comment of the conversation notice is switched to the display mode set in the conversation notice variation pattern and displayed.

In this way, within the maximum conversation notice period, the display of the comment can be switched according to the operation of the frame button 22, and even if the comment that the conversation of the conversation notice is not established is displayed once, the player Can be expected to replace the conversation that is established by pressing the frame button 22.

Next, the conversation notice pattern table (hit) shown in FIG. 82 is a table selected when the hit / fail determination result is a hit. In the conversation notice pattern table (hit) shown in FIG. 82, the conversation notice pattern is divided into a case where the jackpot type is jackpot A (16 rounds probability variation jackpot) and a case where the jackpot B (16 rounds normal jackpot). Patterns 1 to 3 are set respectively. The value of the display effect counter 233k is assigned to each of the patterns 1 to 3. Pattern 2 has the largest number of values set for the display effect counter 233k, and is configured to be easily selected.

Here, the conversation content of pattern 2 in the case of jackpot A will be described. The conversation notice in the seventh embodiment is executed when the odd-numbered symbol on the left symbol and the even-numbered symbol on the right symbol are stopped in the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, the left symbol is a symbol that notifies that it is a jackpot A when it becomes a big hit, and the right symbol is a conversation notice with the symbol that notifies that it is a jackpot B when it is a big hit is stopped. Is executed.

In the conversation notice of pattern 2 in the case of jackpot A, the comment "Compete together !!" is displayed from the left symbol at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the conversation notice fluctuation pattern. After a predetermined time, a comment "OK !!" is displayed from the design on the right to notify that the conversation has been established. After that, if the frame button 22 is pressed by the player within 5 seconds, the comment "I will win this time !!" is displayed from the left symbol. After a predetermined time, a comment "Maybe you lose ..." is displayed from the right symbol, and a comment is displayed that makes the player expect the left symbol to win in the conversation notice production. After that, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player within 5 seconds, the comment "The condition is in excellent condition !!" is displayed from the left symbol, and after a predetermined time, the right symbol says "It's dangerous ...". A comment is displayed, and a comment that makes the player expect the left symbol to win is displayed.

With this configuration, the left symbol is a symbol to which the jackpot A is given when the jackpot is hit, so that the player can be expected to become the jackpot A more. Further, when the determination result is actually the jackpot A, the conversation notice of this pattern 2 is easier to be selected than when the jackpot B, so that it can be expected that the jackpot A will be the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the conversation content of the pattern 2 selected when the determination result is the jackpot B, the second and subsequent comments of the jackpot A and the left symbol and the right symbol are exchanged. Therefore, the player expects a jackpot B instead of a jackpot A. However, when the determination result is the jackpot A, the pattern 3 is set to the same conversation content as the pattern 2, so even with this pattern 2, the expectation for the jackpot is completely lost. Can be prevented.

In this way, the probability that the conversation notice pattern will be selected is set higher depending on the jackpot type, so that the success / failure determination result and the jackpot type can be discriminated from the conversation content. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the conversation pattern. Therefore, the conversation notice can be more entertained by the player.

The conversation notice effect data table 234a7 is a data table for displaying the conversation notice effect shown in FIG. 78 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. The conversation notice effect data table 234a7 has a conversation advance notice effect data table 1 in which the effect time shown in FIG. 83 (a) is set to 10 seconds, and a conversation in which the effect time shown in FIG. 83 (b) is set to 8 seconds. It is composed of a notice effect data table 2 and a conversation notice effect data table 3 in which the effect time shown in FIG. 84 is set to 5 seconds.

In the conversation notice data table 234a7, background data indicating the background of the competition, display data indicating the symbol to be displayed, and various effect display data are set. Although omitted, parameters such as various display positions and enlargement ratios are also set as in the display data table in the first embodiment. In the conversation notice production data tables 1 to 3 having different production times, the speed at which the symbol moves to the goal is set to be different. In detail, the displacement of the display position of the symbol is variably set for each address. In addition to the above description, a plurality of conversation notice data tables 234a7 are set for each winning symbol and each displayed symbol.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment>
The frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) of the main process (not shown) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment is the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 74) in the sixth embodiment. , S1307), the same process is executed. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the second embodiment are executed.

<Control processing executed by the display control device 114 in the seventh embodiment>
In the V interrupt processing (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the seventh embodiment, the V interrupt processing (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment The command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110) and the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103), which are one process, are divided into the command determination process 6 (FIG. 85, S2190) and the display setting process 3 (FIG. 86, S2650), respectively. has been changed. As for other processes, the same processes as those executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the second embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 6 (S2190) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2190). In the command determination process 6 (FIG. 85, S2190) in the seventh embodiment, the display conversation notice process (S2209) is changed to the process of S2280 with respect to the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110) in the second embodiment. The processing of S2281 to S2282 has been added. The processes S2201 to S2206, S2215 to S2218, and S2220 to S2223 are the same as the processes S2201 to S2206, S2215 to S2218, and S2220 to S2223 in the second embodiment.

In the process of S2221, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is such that the conversation notice can be established (S2221: Yes), the value of the display effect counter 233k is acquired, and based on the value, the hit / fail judgment result, and the jackpot type. Then, the conversation notice pattern is selected from the conversation notice pattern table 234a6 (S2280).

Further, in the process of S2206, when it is determined that the display stop type command has not been received (S2206: No), it is determined whether or not the button pressing command has been received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2281). When it is determined that the button pressing command has been received (S2281: Yes), the button pressing flag 233n is set to ON (S2282).

Next, the display setting process 3 (S2650) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the display setting process 3 (S2650). In the display setting process 3 (FIG. 86, S2650) in the seventh embodiment, the button pressing effect process 2 (FIG. 87, S3060) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103) in the second embodiment. There is. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the second embodiment are executed.

After the process of S3007 is executed, the button pressing effect process 2 is executed (S3060). The button pressing effect processing 2 (S3060) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 87.

With reference to FIG. 87, a button pressing effect process 2 (S3060), which is one process in the display setting process 3 (FIG. 86, S2650) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the button pressing effect processing 2 (S3060).

In the button pressing effect process 2 (FIG. 87, S3060), first, it is determined whether or not the button valid period has started (S3061). Whether or not the button validity period has started is preset in the display data table of the set conversation notice variation pattern, and is determined by the setting. In the process of S3061, when it is determined that the button valid period has started (S3061: Yes), the button effect flag 233p is set to ON (S3062). On the other hand, if it is determined that the button validity period has not started (S3061: No), the process of S3063 is executed.

In the process of S3063, it is determined whether the button is in the valid period (S3063). When it is determined that the button is in the valid period (S3063: Yes), the value of the progress counter 233r is added by 1 (S3064). It is determined whether the value of the progress counter 233r is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (S3065). In the present embodiment, the predetermined value here is set to a value indicating 5 seconds. In the process of S3065, when it is determined that the value of the progress counter 233r is less than a predetermined value (S3065: No), it is determined whether the button pressing flag 233n is on (S3066). If it is determined that the button press flag 233n is off (S3066: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the button pressing flag 233n is on (S3066: Yes), the value of the progress counter 233r is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S3067).

In this way, by resetting the progress counter 233r based on the determination that the button pressing flag 233n indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed is on, the time when the frame button 22 is not pressed can be accurately determined. It can be timed.

After the process of S3067 is executed, the display data of the next conversation content is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3068) based on the selected conversation notice pattern, and the button press flag 233n is set to off. (S3069). Here, after the data of the first conversation content is set, the data of the second conversation content, and after the data of the second conversation content is set, the data of the third conversation content. Is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3063 that the button is out of the valid period (S3063: No), or when it is determined in the process of S3065 that the value of the progress counter 233r is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S3065: Yes). ), The process of S3070 is executed. In the process of S3070, it is determined whether or not the button effect flag 233p is on (S3070). When it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is off (S3070: No), this process ends.

When it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is on (S3070: Yes), it is determined whether the selected conversation notice variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the conversation is established (S3071). When it is determined that the conversation pattern is a variation pattern (S3071: Yes), the conversation notice effect data table is determined based on the remaining time until the reach display mode. Here, for example, when the remaining time is 10 seconds or more, the conversation notice effect data table 1 (see FIG. 83 (a)) having an effect time of 10 seconds is selected, and the remaining time is 8 seconds to less than 10 seconds. In that case, the conversation notice effect data table 2 (see FIG. 83 (b)) is selected, and when the remaining time is 5 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, the conversation notice effect data table 3 (see FIG. 83 (c)) is selected. ) Is selected.

In this way, by configuring to select one of the conversation notice effect data tables 1 to 3 based on the remaining time until the reach display mode is started, until the reach display mode is started. It is possible to effectively use the time to perform a conversation notice effect. Further, since the maximum conversation notice period is set 5 seconds before the reach display mode is started, it is possible to show the player all the conversation notice effects even when the remaining time is the shortest. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S3070, when it is determined that the conversation is a variation pattern in which the conversation is not established (S3071: No), the process of S3073 is executed.

In the process of S3073, the end of the conversation notice is set (S3073). Here, when the conversation notice effect is executed, the display data of the last address of the conversation notice effect data table is set to be repeatedly displayed until the reach display mode is started. Further, when the conversation notice is not established and the conversation notice is terminated, the display based on the display data table of the set conversation notice variation pattern is set to be displayed.

After the processing of S3073 is executed, the button effect flag 233p is set to off (S3074), the progress counter 233r, and the button validity period are reset to 0, which is the initial value (S3075).

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed on the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, a stop symbol discrimination flag for discriminating the stopped symbol is set. The process of storing the previous stop symbol discrimination flag in the area for storing it was being executed. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the area for storing the previous stop symbol discrimination flag is not provided and the process for storing the previous stop symbol discrimination flag is not executed. .. Further, in the eighth embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation is discriminated, it is determined whether the conversation notice is feasible, and the process of executing the conversation notice is performed. It differs from the first embodiment. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment>
The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment is a variation display of the main process (see FIG. 28) with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) has been changed to the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 47, S1320). Since the details of the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 47, S1320) have already been described in the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Control processing executed by the display control device 114 in the eighth embodiment>
In the V interrupt processing (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the eighth embodiment, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 33 (b)). The command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) and the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103), which are one of the processes in (1), are the command determination process 7 (FIG. 89, S2350) and the display setting process 4 (FIG. 91, S2750). Each has been changed to. As for other processes, the same processes as those executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the second embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 7 (S2350) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 7 (S2350). In the command determination process 7 (FIG. 89, S2350) in the eighth embodiment, the variation pattern command process (FIGS. 35 (a), S2205) is varied with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment. It has been changed to the pattern command process 3 (FIG. 90, S2450), and each process from S2208 to S2211 has been deleted. For other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

If it is determined that the display variation pattern command has been received in the process of S2204 (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command process 3 is executed (S2450). The variation pattern command process 3 (S2450) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 90.

The variation pattern command process 3 (S2450) will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process 3 (S2450).

In the variation pattern command process 3 (FIG. 90, S2450), first, it is determined whether the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is a predetermined value or more (in the present embodiment, a value indicating 3 seconds or more) (S2451). When it is determined that the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is less than a predetermined value (S2451: No), it is determined whether or not the stored stop symbol determination flag indicates a symbol capable of giving a conversation notice. Here, the symbol capable of giving a conversation notice is a combination in which the left symbol and the right symbol are symbols other than the reach.

In this embodiment, the combination other than the reach is used, but the combination is not limited to the reach, and the conversation notice may be given by the combination of the reach. In such a case, even if the player stops at the stop symbol that is out of reach, the conversation notice is executed in the next fluctuation, so that the two fluctuations can be made to appear as if they are one fluctuation. Further, even if all the symbols have the same symbol after the big hit, the conversation notice may be executed. In such a case, by setting a special conversation notice, for example, a conversation about the big hit, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game immediately after the big hit.

In the process of S2452, if it is determined that the stop symbol determination flag indicates a symbol capable of giving a conversation notice (S2452: Yes), the selected variation pattern is the conversation advance notice variation pattern in which the conversation is established. Is determined (S2453). When it is determined that the conversation pattern is a variation pattern (S2453: Yes), the display conversation notice process is executed (S2209). Since the display conversation notice process (S2209) is the same as that already described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 36, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S2453, when it is determined that the conversation is a conversation notice variation pattern in which the conversation is not established (S2453: No), the display conversation dummy notice process is executed (S2222). Since the details of the display conversation dummy advance notice process (S2222) have already been described in the second embodiment with reference to FIG. 49 (b), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S2456, a display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d is set. (S2456).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time is displayed. Set to the display data table buffer 233d.

If the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device 110. When instructed by, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having the above is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the next display pattern from the main control device 110 Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. You can keep watching the fluctuation of the design.

Next, the initial symbol information is set in the display data table set in the process of S2456 based on the stop symbol discrimination flag (S2456). Here, in the display data table according to the eighth embodiment, initial symbol information is set for all the offset information of the symbol display until the end of the high-speed fluctuation, based on the stop symbol determination flag. As a result, when the third symbol is scrolled frame by frame from the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation at the start of the fluctuation and the display is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, the stop symbol discrimination flag determined by the current fluctuation is used. Therefore, the symbol can be offset by the offset information and displayed in a variable manner, and the stop symbol can be naturally stopped and displayed with the correct stop symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2456 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2458). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table set by the processing of S2456 is turned on, and other display data tables are turned on. The data table determination flag corresponding to is set to off (S2459). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can do.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2456, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2460), and the pointer 233f Is initialized to 0 (S2461). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2462).

Next, the display setting process 4 (S2750) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the display setting process 4 (S2750). In the display setting process 4 (FIG. 91, S2750) in the eighth embodiment, the process of S3015 is deleted from the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103) in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

As described above, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment, the stop symbol is discriminated and the symbol is changed even if the process of copying the stop symbol discrimination flag and holding the flag during the next fluctuation is not executed. Or, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the conversation notice. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process when the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 stops and displays the third symbol. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. After that, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is unused, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, it is in use) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown). ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may confirm the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when the access is terminated, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can perform the access. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is the transfer data that is not the Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer processing can be executed by utilizing the time when the important processing in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 is used for image data without affecting the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address at that address. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 having the configuration described in the above embodiment, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234, and after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may store a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above embodiment, a first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case is not limited to this, and a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the internal bus (bus line 240). A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program that is first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), etc. are provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and MPU231 is provided. You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured so that the resident video RAM 235 can be directly connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type DRAM (input / output port is 1 port) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and multi-port A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously retained during power-on is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read new image data to be resident, and the read image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is supplied. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where many data signals are exchanged. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. Thereby, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are input from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 from the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. You may transfer directly to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the time main image or the like. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply is supplied. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 235 When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the game machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the game machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is transferred. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 The increase in load can be suppressed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be main. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 38). By executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 39) when the above is determined, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive an error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13. May be good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress the flow of the ball being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the ball into the ball entry port. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined that the main control device 110 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is generated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, it is determined that the display control device 114 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, and the display control device 113 May display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used, the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to generate an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player behaves illegally. It can be deterred.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone at that time corresponding to the address expressed in units of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for the frame is displayed, and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. The transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required when drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing contents and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured as.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various kinds of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player The case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is specified has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data third of the display data table.

In the above embodiment, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are included in the display data table has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. .. Further, even if the additional data table includes not only the additional drawing contents but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing contents. Good. As a result, the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing can be specified. Therefore, from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transferred data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect is described, for example. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variation effect are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. "Fluctuating start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

In the above embodiment, a case where a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described, but each data table has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of an image for one frame at which the drawing process is completed will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), a V interrupt signal is signaled for each display of the images for one frame. Can be kept accurate without timing the time interval by sending.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer may be replaced.

In the above embodiment, after the final display data table corresponding to the final display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113 until the final display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo production is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the fluctuation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demo command (demo command for display) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the final display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the rear image and stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, only the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of turning on the power can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on is transferred to the fluctuating image area 235b at power-on immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the variation display by the variation image when the power is turned on.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image (drawing content) to be drawn at that time and the transfer data table should be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn, which is defined at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and refers to the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction for transferring image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 after determining whether or not the data is transferred has been described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 will be transferred to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “back surface A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the back image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed in the above from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information regarding the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the data to the video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed variation. , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image y image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. ..

In the above embodiment, the hold ball number command is mainly controlled every time the value (N) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, so that the main control device 110 and The control burden on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertically The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, it is equipped with a display device that displays a variable display of a sequence of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirms the symbols, and does not have a handle for launching a ball. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

In addition, some or all of the above-described embodiments and modifications may be combined.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic A group>
Based on a display means for displaying identification information indicating a game win / fail determination result composed of at least a plurality of symbol strings, a display control means for displaying the identification information on the display means, and a game win / fail determination result. Then, as the identification information indicating the hit, the stop symbol determining means for displaying the same symbol on the display control means and the identification information indicating the hit / fail determination result after the identification information is dynamically started to be displayed are stopped. A reach display mode in which the other symbol rows other than one symbol row are displayed with the same symbol among the plurality of symbol rows until they are displayed, and a non-reach display mode different from the reach display mode. The symbol display control means to be displayed and the symbol display control means display the combination of the non-reach display modes, and among the non-reach display modes, those based on the symbols displayed in one symbol string and others. When the effect display means for displaying the specific effect display related to the one based on the symbol displayed in the symbol string of the above and the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfy the predetermined conditions, the above A game machine A1 comprising: a privilege giving means for displaying the reach display mode by a symbol display control means.

According to the game machine A1, identification information indicating the result of determining whether or not the game is a game consisting of at least a plurality of symbol strings is displayed by the display means. Identification information is displayed on the display means by the display control means. Based on the winning / failing determination result of the game, the stop symbol determining means causes the display control means to display the same symbol as the identification information indicating the winning. From the start of dynamic display of the identification information to the time when the identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss judgment is stopped and displayed, the other symbol strings other than one of the plurality of symbol strings are the same symbol. The displayed reach display mode and the non-reach display mode different from the reach display mode are displayed by the symbol display control means. The symbol display control means displays a combination of non-reach display modes, and among the non-reach display modes, one based on the symbol displayed in one symbol row and one based on the symbol displayed in the other symbol row. The specific effect display related to and is displayed by the effect display means. When the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition, the reach display mode is displayed by the privilege giving means by the symbol display control means. As a result, even when the non-reach display mode is displayed, the specific effect display satisfying a predetermined condition is displayed, so that a big hit can be expected. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation of a bigger hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

In the game machine A1, in the specific effect display, the first condition is satisfied by the first specific effect displayed in relation to the symbols displayed on the one symbol string and the other symbol string and the first specific effect. If so, it is composed of at least a second specific effect displayed in relation to the first specific effect, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the second condition is satisfied in the second specific effect. A game machine A2 characterized by being there.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, when the first specific effect displayed in relation to the symbols stopped and displayed in one symbol string and the other symbol string and the first condition are satisfied by the first specific effect, the first specific effect is set. At least the specific effect is composed of the second specific effect displayed in connection with it. When the second condition is satisfied in the second specific effect, the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, when a plurality of conditions are satisfied, the display is performed in the reach display mode, so that the player's expectation for the jackpot can be gradually increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by the specific production.

In the game machine A2, the symbol displayed by the one symbol row and the other symbol row is composed of a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol, and the first specific effect of the specific effect display is When a comment is displayed from the symbol of the symbol displayed in the one symbol row and the symbol of the symbol displayed in the other symbol row, and the combination of the comments is a predetermined combination. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that it is configured so that the first condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A2, the following effects are played. That is, one symbol sequence and another symbol sequence are each composed of a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol. A comment is displayed from the design of the design displayed in one design row and the design of the design displayed in the other design row, and the first case is when the combination of the comments is a predetermined combination. The first specific effect of the specific effect display is configured so that the condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the first condition is satisfied by the combination of comments. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the game machine A2, the one symbol string and the other symbol string are each composed of a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol, and the second specific effect of the specific effect display is the one symbol string. Achievement dynamic display mode in which the second condition is satisfied and non-achievement dynamic display in which the second condition is not satisfied, in which the design of the design displayed in the above and the design of the design displayed in the other design row are displayed, respectively. The gaming machine A4, characterized in that at least one of the aspects is displayed.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A2, the following effects are played. That is, one symbol sequence and another symbol sequence are each composed of a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol. Achievement of the second condition in which the symbol of the symbol stopped and displayed in one symbol row and the symbol of the symbol stopped and displayed in the other symbol row are respectively achieved Dynamic display mode and non-achievement not satisfying the second condition Either one of the dynamic display modes is displayed at least in the second specific effect of the specific effect display. As a result, even if the second specific effect is performed, the pattern of the stopped symbol is also displayed, so that the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the lottery game is still in progress. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the game machines A1 to A4, the display control means dynamically displays the plurality of symbol rows by scrolling in a predetermined direction, and the symbol display control means displays the symbols in the non-reach display mode. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that a sequence of symbols other than those displayed in the non-reach display mode is scrolled and dynamically displayed even while the game is being displayed.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the following effect is played. That is, a plurality of symbol sequences are dynamically displayed by scrolling in a predetermined direction by the display control means. While the symbol display control means is displaying in the non-reach display mode, the symbol strings other than those displayed in the non-reach display mode are scrolled and dynamically displayed by the display control means. As a result, the player can easily identify that the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed even when the specific effect display is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristic B group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for receiving the control signal from the main control means to execute the control of the game, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the starting condition. It also has a hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / miss determination, and a hit / miss determination signal generating means for generating a hit / miss determination signal indicating the hit / miss determination result by the hit / miss determination means and outputting the result to the slave control means. The slave control means includes a display means for displaying identification information for notifying a hit / fail judgment result based on the hit / miss judgment signal composed of at least a plurality of symbol strings, and a display control means for displaying the identification information on the display means. , A stop symbol determining means for determining a symbol for stopping and displaying the plurality of symbol sequences as the identification information indicating a hit / fail determination result based on the hit / fail determination signal, and a lottery game based on the establishment of the lottery condition. In the game machine in which the above is executed, the slave control means displays a specific effect display related to the stop symbol of the lottery game executed immediately before on the display means based on the start of the next lottery game. A game characterized in that it has an effect display means and a privilege effect display means for displaying a privilege effect when the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition. Machine B1.

According to the game machine B1, in the main control means for executing the control of the game, the hit / fail determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. A pass / fail determination signal indicating a pass / fail determination result by the pass / fail determination means is generated by the pass / fail determination signal generation means, and is output to a secondary control means that executes game control according to a control signal output from the main control means. In the slave control means, the identification information for notifying the hit / fail determination result based on the hit / miss determination signal composed of at least a plurality of symbol strings is displayed by the display means. Identification information is displayed on the display means by the display control means. A symbol for stopping and displaying a plurality of symbol sequences is determined by the stop symbol determining means as identification information indicating a hit / fail determination result based on the hit / fail determination signal. The specific effect display related to the stop symbol of the lottery game executed immediately before is displayed on the display means by the effect display means based on the start of the next lottery game. When the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition, the privilege effect is displayed by the privilege effect display means. As a result, the specific effect display related to the stop symbol of the previous lottery game is displayed, so that the two lottery games can be shown to the player as if they were one lottery game. In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the privilege effect is displayed, so that the game can be enjoyed more. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine B1, the slave control means has a stop symbol determining means for discriminating the stop symbol of the previous lottery game, and the effect display means of the slave control means is predetermined by the stop symbol discriminating means. The game machine B2 is characterized in that the specific effect display is displayed based on the determination that the stop symbol is obtained.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, in the slave control means, the stop symbol of the previous lottery game is determined by the stop symbol determining means. The specific effect display is displayed by the effect display means based on the determination that the stop symbol is a predetermined stop symbol by the stop symbol determination means. As a result, the opportunity for the specific effect to be displayed can be randomized, and there is an effect that the specific effect can be executed to give a fresh taste.

In the game machine B1, the main control means obtains acquisition means for acquiring the hit / fail determination information to be determined by the hit / fail determination means based on the establishment of the start condition, and the lottery for the win / fail determination information acquired by the acquisition means. A storage means that stores until the condition is satisfied, a pre-determination means that determines the winning / failing determination result before the lottery condition is satisfied based on the winning / failing determination information stored in the storage means, and the identification information. A dynamic display mode determining means for determining one of the plurality of dynamic display modes based on the result of determining whether or not the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means, and a dynamic display mode determining means thereof. A pre-dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means before the lottery condition is satisfied based on the discrimination information determined by the pre-determining means, and a prior dynamic display mode determining means thereof. The plurality of dynamic displays include a pre-signal generating means that generates a pre-signal indicating a discriminating result between the dynamic display mode discriminating means and the pre-determining means and outputs the pre-signal to the slave control means. A predetermined specific dynamic display mode is set in the mode, and when the effect display means of the slave control means determines that the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the prior signal, the specific dynamic display mode is determined. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the specific effect display is displayed in relation to the stop symbol of the lottery game immediately before the identification information dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, in the main control means, the hit / fail determination information for which the hit / fail judgment is determined based on the establishment of the start condition is acquired by the acquisition means. The winning / failing determination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means until the lottery condition is satisfied. Based on the winning / failing determination information stored in the storage means, the winning / failing determination result is determined by the pre-determination means before the lottery condition is satisfied. The dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means among the plurality of dynamic display modes based on the result of the hit / miss determination. Based on the discrimination information determined by the pre-determination means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is determined by the pre-dynamic display mode determining means before the lottery condition is satisfied. A pre-signal indicating the discrimination result between the pre-dynamic display mode discriminating means and the pre-discriminating means is generated by the pre-signal generating means and output to the slave control means. A predetermined specific dynamic display mode is set in the plurality of dynamic display modes. When the slave control means determines that the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the prior signal, it is related to the stop symbol of the lottery game immediately before the identification information dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. Then, the specific display effect is displayed by the effect display means. As a result, when the specific dynamic display mode is displayed, the specific effect display can be displayed, as if the lottery game continues from the lottery game immediately before the specific dynamic display mode. It can be reminiscent of a player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a production that gives a novel impression to the player.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, the main control means is the player after the same symbol is displayed in the plurality of symbol strings which are the identification information indicating that the hit / fail determination result is a hit. The subordinate control means has a jackpot game execution means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and after the plurality of symbol strings are dynamically displayed, the subordinate control means is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating a hit / fail determination result. In the meantime, among the plurality of symbol rows, other symbol rows other than one symbol row are displayed in the same symbol display mode and a non-reach display mode different from the reach display mode. A game having means, and the privilege effect display means of the slave control means displays the privilege effect that notifies the player in advance whether or not the reach display mode is displayed. Machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the following effect is played. That is, in the main control means, after the same symbol is displayed in each of a plurality of symbol sequences which are identification information indicating that the hit / fail determination result is a hit, a privilege advantageous to the player is given by the jackpot game execution means. Will be done. In the slave control means, after the plurality of symbol strings are dynamically displayed and before the display is stopped by the identification information indicating the pass / fail determination result, the other symbol strings other than one of the plurality of symbol strings are excluded. The symbol display control means displays the reach display mode in which the same symbol sequence is displayed and the non-reach display mode different from the reach display mode. The privilege effect display means for notifying the player in advance whether or not the reach display mode is displayed is displayed. As a result, the privilege effect is displayed, and the expectation for the big hit can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game in the expectation that the privilege effect will be displayed, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines B1 to B4, the symbols constituting the plurality of symbol rows are each composed of a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol, and the specific effect display is one symbol among the stop symbols. A comment is displayed from the symbol of the symbol stopped and displayed in the column and the symbol of the symbol displayed stopped in another symbol column, respectively, and when the combination of the comments is a predetermined combination, the predetermined condition The gaming machine B5, which is configured to hold the above.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B4, the following effect is played. That is, each of the symbols constituting the plurality of symbol rows is composed of a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol. Of the stopped symbols, when a comment is displayed from the symbol that is stopped and displayed in one symbol row and the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the other symbol row, and the combination of the comments is a predetermined combination. The specific effect display is configured so that a predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the first condition is satisfied by the combination of comments. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristic C group>
The winning / failing determination means for determining the success / failure of the game, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the success / failure determination result by the success / failure determination means, the display control means for displaying the identification information on the display means, and the identification information. When the display means has the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed, and the display means displays the identification information indicating that the hit / fail determination result is correct, the player In a gaming machine in which a privileged game is started, the display means starts dynamic display in a dynamic display mode in which the identification information is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, and then the result is correct or not. The auxiliary information display means for displaying the information related to the game separately from the identification information is provided until the identification information indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed, and the plurality of instruction symbols are used as the display means. It has an instruction symbol display means to be displayed, and an auxiliary display mode control means for displaying a display mode related to one instruction symbol among the instruction symbols displayed by the instruction symbol display means on the auxiliary information display means. A game machine C1 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine C1, the success or failure of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the display means. Identification information is displayed in the display means. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. When the display means displays the identification information indicating that the hit / miss determination result is a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is started. Information related to the game between the time when the identification information starts the dynamic display in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the time when the identification information indicating the pass / fail determination result is stopped and displayed. Is provided in the display means as an auxiliary information display means in which is displayed separately from the identification information. An instruction symbol indicating each of the plurality of display modes is displayed on the display means by the instruction symbol display means. Among the instruction symbols displayed by the instruction symbol display means, the display mode related to one instruction symbol is displayed on the auxiliary information display means by the auxiliary display mode control means. As a result, the information displayed on the auxiliary information display means can be made more noticeable to the player. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game paying attention to the information displayed on the auxiliary information display means, and the interest of the game can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine C1, the instruction symbol determining means for determining two or more of the instruction symbols to be displayed on the instruction symbol display means from the plurality of instruction symbols based on the hit / fail determination result, and the instruction symbol determination thereof. From the two or more instruction symbols determined by the means, the display mode of the auxiliary information display means is displayed by the auxiliary display mode control means in a display mode related to the instruction symbol based on the hit / fail determination result. A game machine C2 comprising a display instruction symbol determining means for determining the instruction symbol.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, two or more designated symbols to be displayed on the designated symbol display means are determined by the designated symbol determining means based on the result of the hit / fail determination. An instruction to display the display mode of the auxiliary information display means by the auxiliary display mode control means in a display mode related to the instruction symbol from among the two or more designated symbols determined by the instruction symbol determining means, based on the result of the hit / fail determination. The symbol is determined by the display instruction symbol determining means. As a result, two or more instruction symbols are determined based on the hit / fail determination result, so that the player can infer the hit / fail determination result from the type of the instruction symbol displayed on the auxiliary information display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can predict a more detailed hit / fail judgment result by displaying the display mode of the auxiliary information display means in the display mode related to the instruction symbol determined based on the hit / miss judgment result. is there.

In the game machine C1, the instruction symbol for displaying the display mode of the auxiliary information display means in the display mode related to the instruction symbol by the auxiliary display mode control means is determined from the plurality of instruction symbols based on the hit / fail determination result. In addition to the first instruction symbol determining means and the instruction symbol determined by the first instruction symbol determining means, the instruction symbol to be displayed on the auxiliary information display means is selected from the plurality of instruction symbols based on the result of hit / fail determination. The gaming machine C3, characterized in that it has a second instruction symbol determining means for determining.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, the instruction symbol for displaying the display mode of the auxiliary information display means in the display mode related to the instruction symbol by the auxiliary display mode control means is determined by the first instruction symbol determining means from a plurality of instruction symbols based on the hit / fail determination result. .. In addition to the instruction symbol determined by the first instruction symbol determining means, the instruction symbol to be displayed on the auxiliary information display means is determined by the second instruction symbol determining means from among a plurality of instruction symbols based on the result of the hit / fail determination. As a result, the player can predict the winning / failing determination result from the type of the instruction symbol displayed on the auxiliary information display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be enjoyed more and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

A game machine characterized in that any one of the game machines C1 to C3 has a display position determining means for determining the display position of each of the instruction symbols to be displayed on the auxiliary information display means by a predetermined lottery control. C4.

According to the game machine C4, in any of the game machines C1 to C3, the display position of each instruction symbol to be displayed on the auxiliary information display means is determined by the display position determining means by a predetermined lottery control, so that the instruction symbol is displayed. The position becomes more random, which has the effect of giving the player a fresher taste.

<Feature D group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means has the game based on the establishment of the starting condition. It has a hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail determination of the above, and a hit / miss determination signal generating means for generating a pass / fail determination signal indicating the hit / miss determination result by the criticality determination means, and the slave control means is from the main control means. It has a display means for displaying identification information indicating a hit / fail determination result based on the hit / fail determination signal, and a display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, based on the establishment of the start condition. In a gaming machine in which the lottery game is performed by starting the dynamic display of the identification information, the main control means displays an identification signal indicating the hit / fail determination result on the slave control means. The subordinate control means includes an identification information determining means for determining identification information indicating a hit / fail determination result based on the identification signal, and the identification information determining means thereof. When a new lottery game is started, the display control means of the slave control means has a storage means for storing the determined identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination, based on the establishment of the start condition. Is based on the previous identification information discriminating means for discriminating the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result displayed in the lottery game immediately before the new lottery game, and the identification information determined by the previous identification information discriminating means. Then, the initial dynamic display setting means for executing the setting to start the dynamic display of the identification information of the new lottery game from the identification information, and the identification information after the initial dynamic display setting means makes the above setting. The storage means by overwriting the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the new lottery game determined by the determining means with the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the previous lottery game stored in the storage means. Dynamic display that stops the dynamic display at the timing when the identification information of the new lottery game determined by the storage control means stored in the storage means and the identification information determination means stored in the storage means is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine D1 characterized by having a stopping means.

According to the game machine D1, the control of the game is executed by the main control means. The control of the game is executed by the subordinate control means according to the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, the hit / miss determination of the game is executed by the hit / miss determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. A hit / fail judgment signal indicating a hit / fail judgment result by the hit / fail judgment means is generated by the hit / miss judgment signal generation means. In the slave control means, identification information indicating a hit / fail determination result based on a hit / miss determination signal from the main control means is displayed by the display means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. Based on the establishment of the starting condition, the dynamic display of the identification information is started and the lottery game is performed. In the main control means, the identification signal for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination is generated and output to the slave control means by the identification signal generation means. In the slave control means, the identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination is determined by the identification information determining means based on the identification signal. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination determined by the identification information determining means is stored in the storage means. In the display control means of the slave control means, when a new lottery game is started based on the establishment of the start condition of the slave control means, the winning or not displayed in the lottery game immediately before the new lottery game. The identification information indicating the determination result is determined by the previous identification information determination means. Based on the identification information determined by the previous identification information determination means, the initial dynamic display setting means executes the setting to start the dynamic display of the identification information of the new lottery game from the identification information. After the initial dynamic display setting means sets, the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the new lottery game determined by the identification information determining means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means, which is the previous lottery game. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail determination is overwritten and stored in the storage means. The dynamic display stop means executes the dynamic display stop at the timing when the identification information of the new lottery game determined by the identification information determination means stored in the storage means is dynamically displayed. As a result, it is not necessary to store both the new lottery game and the previous lottery game for the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result, and the amount of data stored in the storage area of the storage means can be reduced. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data of the storage means.

In the game machine D1, the slave control means displays the specific effect display related to the identification information determined by the previous identification information determination means on the display means based on the start of the next new lottery game. A game characterized in that it has an effect display means and a privilege effect display means for displaying a privilege effect when the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition. Machine D2.

According to the game machine D2, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the game machine D1. That is, in the slave control means, the specific effect display related to the identification information previously determined by the identification information determination means is displayed on the display means by the effect display means based on the start of the next new lottery game. When the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition, the privilege effect is displayed by the privilege effect display means. As a result, the specific effect related to the identification information displayed in the previous lottery game is displayed based on the start of a new lottery game, so that it appears as if the dynamic display of the identification information is continuing. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the two lottery games can be made to look like one lottery game.

In the game machine D2
The effect display means is characterized in that it displays the specific effect display when the identification information determined by the previous identification information determination means is predetermined identification information. Machine D3.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, when the identification information previously determined by the identification information discrimination means is predetermined identification information, the specific effect display is displayed by the effect display means. Since it is displayed, the specific effect display is displayed at random occasions, and there is an effect that the player can provide a fresh effect.

<Feature E>
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination of a game,
A display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / miss judgment means,
A display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means,
A dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode from a plurality of dynamic display modes for dynamically displaying the identification information,
In a game machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player
The plurality of dynamic display modes include a specific dynamic display mode in which the display of the first specific effect display and the second specific effect display is preset.
Based on the player operating the operating means within the display period of the first specific effect display, the display period of the first specific effect display is extended, while the display period of the first specific effect display is within the display period. A first specific effect adjusting means for shortening the display period of the first specific effect display based on the fact that the operation means was not operated by the player for a predetermined time.
When the display period of the first specific effect display is extended by the first specific effect adjusting means, the display period of the second specific effect display is shortened, while the first specific effect adjusting means causes the first specific effect display. The gaming machine E1 is characterized by having a second specific effect adjusting means for extending the display period of the second specific effect display when the display period of the specific effect display is shortened.

According to the game machine E1, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means. Identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the display means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means from among a plurality of dynamic display modes. The plurality of dynamic display modes include a specific dynamic display mode in which the display of the first specific effect display and the second specific effect display is preset. The display period of the first specific effect display is extended by the first specific effect adjusting means based on the player operating the operation means within the display period of the first specific effect display. Further, the display period of the first specific effect display is shortened by the first specific effect adjusting means based on the fact that the operating means is not operated by the player for a predetermined time within the display period of the first specific effect display. To. When the display period of the first specific effect display is extended by the first specific effect adjusting means, the display period of the second specific effect display is shortened by the second specific effect adjusting means. Further, when the display period of the first specific effect display is shortened by the first specific effect adjusting means, the display period of the second specific effect display is extended by the second specific effect adjusting means. Thereby, the effect time can be adjusted as intended by the player while suppressing the change in the display period of the first specific effect and the second specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a production that is more tailored to the player.

Each of the gaming machines is a gaming machine Z1 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through a winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The game machine Z2, wherein each of the game machines is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. ..
In such a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a player is given a notice effect related to the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-279560).
In this type of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine that improves the interest in the game and prevents the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. The purpose is.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is provided with a pass / fail determination means for determining the pass / fail of the game, a display means for displaying the identification information indicating the pass / fail determination result by the pass / fail determination means, and the display means. It has a display control means for displaying the identification information and a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the display means has a hit / fail determination result. When the identification information indicating that it is a hit is displayed, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is started, and the display means is dynamically displayed with the identification information determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. There is an auxiliary information display means for displaying information related to the game separately from the identification information between the time when the dynamic display is started in the mode and the time when the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result is stopped and displayed. The auxiliary information includes the instruction symbol display control means for displaying the plurality of instruction symbols on the display means and the display mode related to one of the instruction symbols displayed by the instruction symbol display control means. It has an auxiliary display mode control means to be displayed on the display means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the instruction symbol displayed by the instruction symbol display control means is selected from the plurality of instruction symbols and two or more of the instruction symbols are selected or rejected. From the instruction symbol determining means determined based on the determination result and the two or more instruction symbols determined by the instruction symbol determining means, the auxiliary information is provided by the auxiliary display mode control means based on the hit / fail determination result. It has a display instruction symbol determining means for determining the instruction symbol which displays the display mode of the display means in the display aspect related to the instruction symbol.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the success or failure of the game is determined by the success or failure determination means. Identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the display means. Identification information is displayed in the display means. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. When the display means displays the identification information indicating that the hit / miss determination result is a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is started.
Information related to the game is displayed between the time when the identification information is dynamically displayed in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the time when the identification information indicating the pass / fail determination result is stopped and displayed. Auxiliary information display means, which is displayed separately from the identification information, is provided in the display means. An instruction symbol indicating each of the plurality of display modes is displayed on the display means by the instruction symbol display control means. Among the instruction symbols displayed by the instruction symbol display control means, the display mode related to one instruction symbol is displayed on the auxiliary information display means by the auxiliary display mode control means.
As a result, the information displayed on the auxiliary information display means can be made more noticeable to the player. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game paying attention to the information displayed on the auxiliary information display means, and the interest of the game can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of Technical Thought 1. That is, two or more designated symbols are determined by the designated symbol determining means from among the plurality of designated symbols, which are displayed by the designated symbol display control means, based on the result of the hit / miss determination. An instruction to display the display mode of the auxiliary information display means by the auxiliary display mode control means in a display mode related to the instruction symbol from among the two or more designated symbols determined by the instruction symbol determining means, based on the result of the hit / fail determination. The symbol is determined by the display instruction symbol determining means.
As a result, two or more instruction symbols are determined based on the hit / fail determination result, so that the player can infer the hit / fail determination result from the type of the instruction symbol displayed on the auxiliary information display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can predict a more detailed hit / fail judgment result by displaying the display mode of the auxiliary information display means in the display mode related to the instruction symbol determined based on the hit / miss judgment result. is there.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 Third symbol display device (display means )

Claims (2)

Judgment means for executing judgment based on the establishment of judgment conditions,
A display means for displaying identification information consisting of at least a plurality of symbol strings for notifying the judgment result by the judgment means, and a display means for displaying the identification information.
As the identification information for showing the determination result of the determination means, the stop symbol determining means for determining the symbol to be stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of symbol sequences, and the stop symbol determining means.
In a gaming machine, the display means includes a display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information and then stopping and displaying the symbol determined by the stop symbol determining means.
When the identification information for showing a specific determination result is displayed, a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player and a privilege giving means.
As a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, a dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode from a plurality of dynamic display modes based on the determination result.
When the display mode of the stop symbol that was stopped and displayed after the dynamic display executed immediately before is the specific display mode, the specific effect display related to the specific display mode is set to start the next dynamic display. Based on the effect display means that can be displayed on the display means,
It has a privilege effect execution means for executing a privilege effect when the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition.
A predetermined specific dynamic display mode is set in the plurality of dynamic display modes.
The effect display means is the specific effect display related to the specific display mode of the stop symbol that is stopped and displayed after the dynamic display immediately before the identification information that is dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. Is displayed ,
Before Symbol gaming machine state, and are able to stop displaying the stop symbols after the dynamic display in a display mode different from the specific display mode,
The stop symbol determination means, wherein as said identification information for indicating the specific determination result, a game machine, wherein determinable der Rukoto a display mode different from the specific display manner. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is composed of a liquid crystal display.

Images